1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format default
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
79 \float_placement class
80 \float_alignment class
84 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
85 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
89 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
90 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
91 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
96 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
97 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
100 \use_package amsmath 1
101 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package cancel 1
104 \use_package mathdots 1
105 \use_package mathtools 1
106 \use_package mhchem 1
107 \use_package stackrel 1
108 \use_package stmaryrd 1
109 \use_package undertilde 1
111 \cite_engine_type default
115 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation skip
141 \math_numbering_side default
142 \quotes_style english
146 \paperpagestyle default
148 \tracking_changes true
149 \output_changes false
153 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
154 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
166 by the \SpecialChar LyX
171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
173 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
174 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
175 Documentation mailing list:
176 \begin_inset CommandInset href
178 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
190 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 \begin_inset Note Note
201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
202 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
203 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
216 \begin_layout Standard
217 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
218 LatexCommand tableofcontents
225 \begin_layout Chapter
229 \begin_layout Section
230 What is \SpecialChar LyX
234 \begin_layout Standard
236 is a document preparation system.
237 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
238 scripts, publishable books, business
239 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
240 It is unlike most other
241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
248 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
250 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 pt type, left justified, 5
267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
276 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
280 \begin_layout Standard
281 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
286 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
290 \begin_layout Standard
295 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
296 's philosophy: most importantly,
297 the format of all of the manuals.
298 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
299 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
305 manual describes that, too.
308 \begin_layout Section
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
315 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
317 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
318 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
324 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
325 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
327 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
328 only a vertical scrollbar.
329 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
330 The first case is large images.
331 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
332 image and use the option
343 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
346 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
347 this doesn't work for equations yet.
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
352 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
360 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
367 \begin_layout Section
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
374 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
376 Just select the manual you want to read from the
383 \begin_layout Section
384 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
388 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
395 \begin_layout Standard
396 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
397 can be configured via the menu
399 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
403 \begin_inset Index idx
406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
413 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
415 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 packages are available.
417 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
419 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
421 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
426 \begin_inset space \space{}
429 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
430 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
432 To force \SpecialChar LyX
433 to re-inspect your system, you should use
435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
439 \begin_inset Index idx
442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
443 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
449 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
450 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
453 \begin_layout Section
456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
458 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
465 \begin_layout Standard
466 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
467 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 installed, but you will not be
469 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
470 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
471 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
472 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
473 document can always be output as plain text
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 or DocBook classes or packages.
480 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
481 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
484 \begin_layout Standard
485 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
487 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
490 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
498 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
499 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
506 \begin_inset Index idx
509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
510 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
518 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
525 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
529 \begin_layout Chapter
530 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
534 \begin_layout Section
535 Basic File Operations
536 \begin_inset Index idx
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
548 \begin_layout Standard
553 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
554 in addition to some more advanced operations:
557 \begin_layout Itemize
579 \begin_layout Itemize
595 arg "buffer-new-template"
601 \begin_layout Itemize
623 \begin_layout Itemize
631 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
635 \begin_layout Itemize
637 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
649 \begin_layout Itemize
661 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
665 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
675 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \begin_layout Itemize
709 arg "buffer-write-as"
713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
717 \begin_layout Itemize
719 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
735 \begin_layout Itemize
749 \begin_layout Itemize
763 \begin_layout Standard
764 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
765 a few minor differences.
768 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
779 command lists the available templates.
780 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
781 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
782 and possibly propose text fragments
784 for the document, features
785 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
788 you would otherwise need to
789 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
791 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
795 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
799 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
807 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
813 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
814 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
818 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
826 \begin_layout Standard
827 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
859 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
860 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
861 is just that — a big, blank space.
869 \begin_layout Standard
890 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
895 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
898 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
916 will reload the document from disk.
917 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
918 and want to restore it to the last save.
927 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
928 them as your changes.
931 \begin_layout Section
932 Basic Editing Features
933 \begin_inset Index idx
936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
945 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
952 \begin_layout Standard
953 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
954 can perform cut and paste operations
955 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
956 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
957 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
958 editing features and how to access
960 We will start with cut and paste.
963 \begin_layout Standard
964 As you might expect, the
968 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
969 various other editing features.
970 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
974 \begin_layout Itemize
980 \begin_inset Index idx
983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1012 \begin_layout Itemize
1018 \begin_inset Index idx
1021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1050 \begin_layout Itemize
1056 \begin_inset Index idx
1059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1084 \begin_layout Itemize
1088 \begin_inset space ~
1094 \begin_layout Itemize
1098 \begin_inset space ~
1104 \begin_layout Itemize
1108 \begin_inset space ~
1112 \begin_inset space ~
1118 \begin_inset Index idx
1121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1130 \begin_inset Index idx
1133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1148 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1158 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1164 \begin_layout Standard
1165 The first three are self-explanatory.
1166 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1167 and other programs by
1188 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1189 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1194 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1195 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1196 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1197 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1198 into individual cells.
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1207 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1208 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1212 \begin_layout Standard
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1221 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1223 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1225 \begin_inset space ~
1232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1238 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1239 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1240 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1246 \begin_inset space \space{}
1249 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1250 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1256 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1266 \begin_inset space ~
1275 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1276 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1278 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1282 \begin_inset space ~
1287 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1288 start a new paragraph.
1289 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1290 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1298 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1304 \begin_inset space ~
1312 \begin_inset space ~
1315 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1318 paste from the primary selection.
1319 This is normally the currently selected text.
1322 \begin_layout Standard
1325 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1327 \begin_inset space ~
1331 \begin_inset space ~
1339 \begin_inset space ~
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1349 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1355 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1358 \begin_inset space ~
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1372 button to skip the current word.
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1385 \begin_inset space ~
1390 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1392 If the toggle is set, searching for
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1404 will not match the word
1405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1419 Match whole words only
1421 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1422 to only find complete words, e.
1423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1452 offers also an advanced
1455 \begin_inset space ~
1459 \begin_inset space ~
1464 feature that is described in section
1465 \begin_inset space ~
1469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1471 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1478 \begin_layout Standard
1479 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1480 \begin_inset space \space{}
1484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1492 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1494 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1499 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1506 \begin_layout Standard
1510 arg "inset-select-all"
1513 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1514 When the cursor is inside an inset
1517 arg "inset-select-all"
1520 selects the content of the inset.
1524 arg "inset-select-all"
1527 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1532 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1535 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1539 \begin_layout Section
1541 \begin_inset Index idx
1544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1551 \begin_inset Index idx
1554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1563 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1570 \begin_layout Standard
1571 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1573 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1576 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1579 or the toolbar button
1585 to undo some mistake.
1586 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1588 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1591 or the toolbar button
1598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1605 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1609 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1612 \begin_layout Standard
1613 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1622 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1623 This is a consequence of the 100
1624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1627 step undo limit mentioned above.
1630 \begin_layout Standard
1639 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1641 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1645 \begin_layout Section
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1660 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1663 \begin_layout Enumerate
1668 \begin_layout Itemize
1673 once anywhere in the edit window.
1674 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1678 \begin_layout Enumerate
1683 \begin_layout Itemize
1690 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1693 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1697 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1700 \begin_layout Itemize
1701 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 \begin_layout Enumerate
1712 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1716 \begin_layout Standard
1717 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1718 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1722 \begin_layout Section
1724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1726 name "sec:Navigating"
1731 \begin_inset Index idx
1734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1743 \begin_layout Standard
1745 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1748 \begin_layout Itemize
1753 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1754 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1758 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1760 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1762 \begin_inset space ~
1767 or by the toolbar button
1770 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1776 \begin_layout Itemize
1777 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1779 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1782 and use the same menu to return to them.
1783 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1786 \begin_layout Standard
1790 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1795 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1796 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1798 \begin_inset space ~
1803 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1804 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1805 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1806 your last editing position.
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1814 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1818 \begin_layout Subsection
1820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1822 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1827 \begin_inset Index idx
1830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1831 Navigating ! Outline
1837 \begin_inset Index idx
1840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1849 \begin_layout Standard
1850 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1851 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1852 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1860 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1864 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1865 \begin_inset space ~
1869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1871 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1876 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1880 \begin_layout Standard
1881 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1882 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1883 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1884 dialog and to modify the citation.
1887 \begin_layout Standard
1892 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1893 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1895 Labels and References
1897 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1906 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1909 \begin_layout Standard
1910 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1911 you further to control the display.
1916 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1917 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1923 option keeps it in the current view state.
1924 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1928 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1932 3, the subsections of sections
1933 \begin_inset space ~
1936 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1941 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1956 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1959 \begin_layout Standard
1966 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1967 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1981 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1982 So, for example, you can move section
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1987 \begin_inset space ~
1990 2.4 or after section
1991 \begin_inset space ~
1996 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2009 (or the corresponding key bindings
2017 ) you can change the level of sections.
2018 So you can for example make section
2019 \begin_inset space ~
2023 \begin_inset space ~
2027 \begin_inset space ~
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2035 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2038 \begin_layout Subsection
2039 Horizontal Scrolling
2040 \begin_inset Index idx
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2054 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2060 \begin_inset space \space{}
2064 \begin_inset space ~
2067 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2068 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2069 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2073 \begin_layout Standard
2074 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2078 \begin_layout Itemize
2080 is used on a small tablet computer
2083 \begin_layout Itemize
2084 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 \begin_inset space ~
2109 \begin_layout Itemize
2110 Math constructs with long command names
2113 \begin_layout Standard
2114 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2115 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2117 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2118 windows so that table
2119 \begin_inset space ~
2123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2125 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2130 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2132 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2133 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2136 \begin_layout Standard
2137 \begin_inset Float table
2144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2150 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2154 Horizontal scrolling test.
2162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_inset Tabular
2165 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2166 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2211 \begin_layout Section
2212 Input/Word Completion
2213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2215 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2220 \begin_inset Index idx
2223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2230 \begin_inset Index idx
2233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2264 \begin_layout Standard
2266 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2268 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2269 is used to propose completions.
2272 \begin_layout Standard
2273 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2281 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2288 \begin_inset space ~
2292 \begin_inset space ~
2297 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2306 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2307 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2311 \begin_inset space ~
2317 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2318 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2319 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2320 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2323 \begin_layout Standard
2325 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2326 completions available.
2331 key to accept a proposed completion.
2332 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2333 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2334 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2341 \begin_layout Standard
2342 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2343 ing options for text.
2344 The special math option
2348 enables characters to be composed.
2349 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2350 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2353 , you can then input the characters
2354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2365 to a formula to get it.
2366 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2367 of the math toolbar.
2368 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2372 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2373 's installation folder.
2374 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2383 \begin_layout Section
2385 \begin_inset Index idx
2388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2395 \begin_inset Index idx
2398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2427 \begin_inset Index idx
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2461 \begin_layout Standard
2462 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2476 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2479 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2483 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2484 \begin_inset space ~
2488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2490 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2497 \begin_layout Standard
2501 \begin_inset space ~
2509 \begin_inset space ~
2530 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2534 \begin_layout Labeling
2535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2539 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2540 LatexCommand nomenclature
2542 description "Tabulator key"
2549 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2551 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2558 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2565 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2569 , especially section
2570 \begin_inset space ~
2574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2576 reference "subsec:Lists"
2582 If you are still confused, look in the
2587 \begin_inset Newline newline
2595 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2596 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2600 \begin_layout Labeling
2601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2605 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2606 LatexCommand nomenclature
2608 description "Escape key"
2616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2623 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2624 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2627 \begin_layout Labeling
2628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2634 \begin_inset space ~
2638 \begin_inset space ~
2645 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2646 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2650 \begin_layout Standard
2651 There are three modifier keys:
2654 \begin_layout Labeling
2655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2673 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2674 LatexCommand nomenclature
2676 description "Control key"
2681 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2682 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2686 \begin_layout Itemize
2695 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2698 \begin_layout Itemize
2707 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2710 \begin_layout Itemize
2719 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2723 \begin_layout Labeling
2724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2742 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2743 LatexCommand nomenclature
2745 description "Shift key"
2750 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2751 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2754 \begin_layout Labeling
2755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2773 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2774 LatexCommand nomenclature
2776 description "Alt or Meta key"
2781 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2782 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2783 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2789 \begin_inset Newline newline
2792 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2794 menu accelerator keys
2797 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2798 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2802 \begin_layout Standard
2803 For example, the sequence
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2810 \begin_inset space ~
2814 \begin_inset space ~
2820 \begin_inset space ~
2828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2847 \begin_inset space ~
2853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2863 \begin_layout Standard
2868 manual lists all other things bound to the
2876 \begin_layout Standard
2877 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2879 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2880 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2881 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2882 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2883 The \SpecialChar LyX
2884 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2885 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2886 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2888 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2904 followed by a capital
2911 \begin_layout Chapter
2914 \begin_inset Index idx
2917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2927 \begin_layout Section
2929 \begin_inset Index idx
2932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2941 \begin_layout Subsection
2945 \begin_layout Standard
2946 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2947 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2948 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2949 numbering schemes, and so on.
2950 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2951 and format the title of your document differently.
2954 \begin_layout Standard
2959 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2960 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2961 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2962 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2963 picks one for you by default.
2964 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2967 \begin_layout Subsection
2969 \begin_inset Index idx
2972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2981 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2988 \begin_layout Standard
2989 You can select a class using the
2991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2992 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2996 \begin_inset Index idx
2999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3006 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3014 \begin_layout Standard
3015 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Article for basic articles
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Report for basic reports
3028 \begin_layout Description
3029 Book for writing a book
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Letter for US-style letters
3036 \begin_layout Standard
3037 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3038 only uses if you have installed
3039 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 distributions will include
3043 Here are some of the classes.
3044 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3046 Special Document Classes
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3064 \begin_layout Description
3065 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3071 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3072 There are three article layouts available.
3073 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3074 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3075 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3076 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3081 sequential numbering
3082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3085 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3086 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3087 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3088 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3091 \begin_layout Description
3092 Beamer Layout for presentations
3095 \begin_layout Description
3096 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3097 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3098 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3099 with \SpecialChar LyX
3103 \begin_layout Description
3104 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3107 \begin_layout Description
3109 \begin_inset space ~
3112 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3115 \begin_layout Description
3116 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3119 \begin_layout Description
3120 Foils Used to make transparencies
3123 \begin_layout Description
3124 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3125 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3126 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3127 with \SpecialChar LyX
3131 \begin_layout Description
3132 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3133 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3136 \begin_layout Description
3137 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3140 \begin_layout Description
3141 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3144 \begin_layout Description
3145 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3146 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3147 (Is used by this document.)
3150 \begin_layout Description
3151 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3154 \begin_layout Description
3155 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3158 \begin_layout Description
3163 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3164 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3166 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3170 \begin_layout Description
3171 Slides Used to make transparencies
3174 \begin_layout Description
3176 \begin_inset space ~
3179 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3180 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3183 \begin_layout Description
3184 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3188 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3190 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3192 Special Document Classes
3199 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3200 of the document classes.
3203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3207 \begin_layout Standard
3208 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3213 \begin_inset Index idx
3216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3233 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3234 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3236 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3239 \begin_layout Standard
3242 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3247 , are highly specialized.
3249 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3250 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3251 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3252 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3253 by some document class.
3254 There are just too many of them.
3255 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3258 \begin_layout Standard
3259 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3267 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3268 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3269 document class for a new file.
3271 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3274 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3281 manual for information on how to install them.
3282 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3288 \begin_layout Standard
3289 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3290 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3291 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3292 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3293 class files to be used for dissertation
3294 s submitted to those universities.
3295 The \SpecialChar LyX
3296 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3298 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3302 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3308 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3315 name "subsec:Modules"
3320 \begin_inset Index idx
3323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3332 \begin_layout Standard
3333 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3334 chosen document class.
3335 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3336 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3343 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3347 \begin_inset Index idx
3350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3357 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3361 \begin_layout Standard
3362 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3363 packages or file format converters that are not always
3364 installed by default.
3366 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3367 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3368 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3369 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3371 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3372 file without the missing prerequisites.
3373 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3374 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3377 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3381 \begin_inset Index idx
3384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3385 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3391 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3396 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3399 \begin_layout Standard
3400 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3410 will advise you about these things.
3418 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3422 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3427 \begin_inset Index idx
3430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3431 Document ! Local Layout
3439 \begin_layout Standard
3440 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3441 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3442 : They are intended to be used in
3443 a variety of different documents.
3444 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3445 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3446 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3447 need a specific inset or
3448 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3450 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3453 style only that one time.
3454 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3456 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3474 manual for information on how to use it.
3477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3481 \begin_layout Standard
3482 Each class has a default set of options.
3483 Here's a quick table describing them:
3486 \begin_layout Standard
3487 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3493 \begin_layout Standard
3495 \begin_inset Tabular
3496 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3497 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3500 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3501 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3502 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_layout Standard
3957 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3963 \begin_layout Standard
3964 You're probably also wondering what
3965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3969 \begin_inset space ~
3973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3977 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3978 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3983 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3988 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3998 headings, there are also
4006 headings, and so on.
4007 We will describe these headings fully in section
4008 \begin_inset space ~
4012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4014 reference "subsec:Headings"
4021 \begin_layout Subsection
4023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4025 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4030 \begin_inset Index idx
4033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4040 \begin_inset Index idx
4043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4052 \begin_layout Standard
4053 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4055 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4062 \begin_inset space ~
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4075 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4077 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4078 doesn't support special options you want to
4079 use for your document.
4080 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4081 -class and its options, you have to read
4085 \begin_layout Standard
4089 \begin_inset space ~
4096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4102 \begin_inset space ~
4107 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4108 You can choose between the following five options:
4111 \begin_layout Labeling
4112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4117 Use default page style of current class.
4120 \begin_layout Labeling
4121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4126 No page numbers or headings.
4129 \begin_layout Labeling
4130 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4138 \begin_layout Labeling
4139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4144 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4145 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4146 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4147 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4150 \begin_layout Labeling
4151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4156 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4157 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4163 \begin_inset Index idx
4166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4174 How they are defined is explained in section
4175 \begin_inset space ~
4179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4181 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4188 \begin_layout Standard
4189 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4190 \begin_inset space ~
4194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4196 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paper Size and Orientation
4205 \begin_inset Index idx
4208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4209 Document ! Paper size
4215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4217 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4225 You can find the following options in the menu
4228 \begin_inset space ~
4235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4239 \begin_inset Index idx
4242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4251 \begin_layout Labeling
4252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4256 \begin_inset space ~
4261 What size paper to print on.
4266 \begin_layout Itemize
4272 \begin_layout Itemize
4278 \begin_layout Itemize
4284 \begin_layout Itemize
4290 \begin_layout Itemize
4293 US letter, US legal, US executive
4296 \begin_layout Itemize
4302 \begin_layout Itemize
4309 \begin_layout Labeling
4310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4315 To choose whether to output as
4326 \begin_layout Labeling
4327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4331 \begin_inset space ~
4336 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4337 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4340 \begin_layout Subsection
4342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4344 name "subsec:Margins"
4349 \begin_inset Index idx
4352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 \begin_inset Index idx
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4371 \begin_layout Standard
4372 Paper margins are set in the menu
4374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4378 \begin_inset Index idx
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4390 \begin_layout Standard
4391 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4392 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4393 the paper format and the font size into account.
4396 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 \begin_layout Standard
4401 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4407 That includes the paragraph environments.
4408 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4409 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4410 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4412 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4421 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4423 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4424 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4425 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4428 \begin_layout Section
4429 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4430 \begin_inset Index idx
4433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4434 Paragraph ! Indentation
4442 \begin_layout Subsection
4444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4446 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4453 \begin_layout Standard
4454 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4455 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4458 \begin_layout Standard
4459 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4460 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4461 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4462 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4466 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4472 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4473 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4474 language than English.
4476 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4480 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4481 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4482 into \SpecialChar LyX
4484 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4487 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4489 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4490 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4491 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4498 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4499 goes to produce a printable file.
4504 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4506 gives you the ability globally to change
4510 these pre-coded spacings.
4511 We will explain more later.
4514 \begin_layout Subsection
4515 Paragraph Separation
4516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4518 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4523 \begin_inset Index idx
4526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4527 Paragraph ! Separation
4535 \begin_layout Standard
4543 \begin_inset space ~
4551 \begin_inset space ~
4558 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4574 \begin_layout Subsection
4578 \begin_layout Standard
4579 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4584 \begin_inset space ~
4589 dialog and toggle the
4592 \begin_inset space ~
4597 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4600 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4604 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4605 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4609 \begin_layout Standard
4610 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4611 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4614 \begin_layout Subsection
4616 \begin_inset Index idx
4619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4620 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4628 \begin_layout Standard
4631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4635 \begin_inset Index idx
4638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4647 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4651 \begin_inset space ~
4660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4661 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 \begin_inset Index idx
4670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4677 installed to use this feature.
4682 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4684 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4686 \begin_inset space ~
4691 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4692 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4695 \begin_layout Section
4696 Paragraph Environments
4697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4699 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4704 \begin_inset Index idx
4707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4708 Paragraph ! Environments
4714 \begin_inset Index idx
4717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4718 Paragraph environments|(
4726 \begin_layout Subsection
4730 \begin_layout Standard
4731 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4743 } \SpecialChar ldots
4753 \begin_inset Newline newline
4756 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4758 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4759 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4760 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4769 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4772 \begin_layout Standard
4773 A paragraph environment is simply a
4774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4781 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4782 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4783 scheme, labels, and so on.
4784 Additionally, you can
4785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4792 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4793 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4794 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4795 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4797 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4799 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4804 \begin_inset Graphics
4805 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4811 at the left end of the toolbar.
4813 will change the environment of the
4817 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4818 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4819 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4823 \begin_layout Standard
4832 create a new paragraph using the
4836 paragraph environment.
4838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4845 because if you are in one of these environments:
4848 \begin_layout Itemize
4854 \begin_layout Itemize
4860 \begin_layout Itemize
4866 \begin_layout Itemize
4872 \begin_layout Itemize
4878 \begin_layout Itemize
4884 \begin_layout Itemize
4890 \begin_layout Standard
4892 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4896 , rather than resetting it to
4901 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4902 \begin_inset space ~
4906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4908 reference "sec:Nesting"
4915 \begin_layout Subsection
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 The default paragraph environment is
4925 It creates a plain paragraph.
4927 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4928 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4929 this manual) are in the
4936 \begin_layout Standard
4937 You can nest a paragraph using the
4941 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4949 \begin_layout Subsection
4951 \begin_inset Index idx
4954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4965 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4974 for thanks or contact information.
4975 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4976 places all of this on a separate page
4977 along with today's date.
4978 For other types of documents, the title
4979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4986 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4990 \begin_layout Standard
4992 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5006 Here's how you use them:
5009 \begin_layout Itemize
5010 Put the title of your document in the
5017 \begin_layout Itemize
5018 Put the author name in the
5025 \begin_layout Itemize
5026 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5027 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5033 Note that using this environment is optional.
5034 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5035 will automatically insert today's date.
5036 If you don't want a date, use the option
5038 Suppress default date on front page
5042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5043 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5045 \begin_inset space ~
5053 \begin_layout Standard
5054 You can use footnotes to insert
5055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5062 or contact information.
5065 \begin_layout Subsection
5067 \begin_inset Index idx
5070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5079 name "subsec:Headings"
5086 \begin_layout Standard
5087 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5089 takes care of the numbering for you.
5092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5094 \begin_inset Index idx
5097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5098 Section headings ! Numbered
5106 \begin_layout Standard
5107 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5111 \begin_layout Enumerate
5117 \begin_layout Enumerate
5123 \begin_layout Enumerate
5129 \begin_layout Enumerate
5135 \begin_layout Enumerate
5141 \begin_layout Enumerate
5147 \begin_layout Enumerate
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5155 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5156 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5157 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5161 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5162 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5163 You group the book into chapters.
5165 does a similar grouping:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 is divided into either
5184 \begin_layout Itemize
5196 \begin_layout Itemize
5208 \begin_layout Itemize
5220 \begin_layout Itemize
5232 \begin_layout Itemize
5244 \begin_layout Standard
5245 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5253 Not all document types use the
5257 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5262 is the top-level heading.
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5275 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5276 labels it with its number,
5277 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5279 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5291 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5293 \begin_inset Index idx
5296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5297 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5305 \begin_layout Standard
5306 The unnumbered section headings have a
5307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5314 at the end of their name.
5315 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5316 the table of contents, see section
5317 \begin_inset space ~
5321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5331 Changing the Numbering
5332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5334 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5341 \begin_layout Standard
5342 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5343 in the Table of Contents.
5344 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5346 Just as certain classes start with
5360 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5370 This is something you can change.
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5380 \begin_inset Index idx
5383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5392 \begin_inset space ~
5396 \begin_inset space ~
5401 you will see two counters.
5406 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5407 numbers a section heading.
5408 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5413 Short Titles of Headings
5414 \begin_inset Index idx
5417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5418 Section headings ! Short titles
5424 \begin_inset Argument 1
5427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5436 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5443 \begin_layout Standard
5444 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5445 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5446 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5447 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5450 \begin_layout Standard
5452 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5453 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5454 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5455 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5460 \begin_inset space ~
5466 This will insert a box labeled
5467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5471 \begin_inset space ~
5475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5478 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5479 This also works for captions inside floats.
5480 There can only be one short title per title.
5483 \begin_layout Standard
5484 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5491 \begin_layout Standard
5492 The following information applies to all section headings:
5495 \begin_layout Itemize
5496 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5499 \begin_layout Itemize
5500 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5504 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5507 \begin_layout Itemize
5508 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5511 \begin_layout Subsection
5515 \begin_layout Standard
5517 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5531 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5532 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5533 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5534 the text they contain.
5535 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5543 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5546 \begin_layout Standard
5547 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5556 when you start a new paragraph.
5557 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5561 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5562 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5563 have to change back to the
5567 environment yourself.
5570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5579 \begin_inset Index idx
5582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_layout Standard
5592 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5593 time for the differences.
5602 are identical except for one difference:
5606 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5615 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5618 \begin_layout Standard
5619 Here's an example of the
5632 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5634 See – no indentation!
5638 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5639 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5640 the other paragraph.
5643 \begin_layout Standard
5644 Here's another example, this time in the
5651 \begin_layout Quotation
5657 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5658 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5659 the first line, then
5663 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5667 you were quoting other text.
5670 \begin_layout Quotation
5671 Here's a new paragraph.
5672 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5673 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5676 \begin_layout Standard
5677 As the examples show,
5681 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5682 They should put quotes in the
5687 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5691 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5696 \begin_inset Index idx
5699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5706 \begin_inset Index idx
5709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5725 \begin_layout Standard
5730 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5736 \begin_inset Newline newline
5739 Which I did not rehearse!
5743 It could be much worse.
5744 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5746 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5747 indented a bit more than the first.
5748 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5754 \begin_inset Newline newline
5757 And make things look fine
5758 \begin_inset Newline newline
5764 arg "newline-insert newline"
5770 \begin_layout Standard
5775 does not indent both margins.
5776 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5777 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5780 arg "newline-insert newline"
5786 \begin_layout Subsection
5788 \begin_inset Index idx
5791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5807 \begin_layout Standard
5809 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5819 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5820 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5829 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5830 lets you provide your own label.
5831 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5832 describing some general features of all four of them.
5835 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5839 \begin_layout Standard
5840 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5842 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5843 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5852 reset the environment to
5856 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5857 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5858 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5862 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5866 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5873 \begin_layout Standard
5874 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5875 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5876 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5878 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5879 you read all of section
5880 \begin_inset space ~
5884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5886 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5895 \begin_inset Index idx
5898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5914 \begin_layout Standard
5915 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5919 paragraph environment.
5920 It has the following properties:
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 The items can have any length.
5941 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5942 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5954 environment inside another
5958 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5962 \begin_layout Itemize
5963 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5966 \begin_layout Itemize
5968 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5971 \begin_layout Itemize
5973 \begin_inset space ~
5977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5979 reference "sec:Nesting"
5983 for a full explanation of nesting.
5987 \begin_layout Standard
5988 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5997 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6000 \begin_layout Standard
6001 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6002 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6005 \begin_layout Itemize
6006 The label for the first level
6010 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6014 \begin_layout Itemize
6015 The label for the second level is a dash.
6019 \begin_layout Itemize
6020 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6024 \begin_layout Itemize
6025 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6029 \begin_layout Itemize
6030 Back out to the third level.
6034 \begin_layout Itemize
6035 Back to the second level.
6039 \begin_layout Itemize
6040 Back to the outermost level.
6043 \begin_layout Standard
6044 These are the default labels for an
6049 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6054 dialog in the submenu
6059 \begin_inset Index idx
6062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6068 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6072 \begin_layout Standard
6073 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6074 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6076 \begin_inset space ~
6080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6082 reference "sec:Nesting"
6089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6091 \begin_inset Index idx
6094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6103 name "sec:Enumerate"
6110 \begin_layout Standard
6115 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6116 It has these properties:
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6129 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6134 \begin_layout Enumerate
6139 environment resets the counter to one.
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6155 \begin_layout Enumerate
6156 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6157 Items can have any length.
6160 \begin_layout Enumerate
6161 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6164 \begin_layout Enumerate
6165 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6168 \begin_layout Enumerate
6169 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6173 \begin_layout Standard
6182 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6184 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6185 labels the four different levels in an
6192 \begin_layout Enumerate
6193 The first level of an
6197 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6201 \begin_layout Enumerate
6202 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6206 \begin_layout Enumerate
6207 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6211 \begin_layout Enumerate
6212 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6215 \begin_layout Enumerate
6216 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6221 \begin_layout Enumerate
6222 Back to the third level
6226 \begin_layout Enumerate
6227 Back to the second level.
6231 \begin_layout Enumerate
6232 Back to the outermost level.
6235 \begin_layout Standard
6236 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6240 environment, see section
6241 \begin_inset space ~
6245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6247 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6252 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6256 \begin_layout Standard
6257 There is more to nesting
6261 environments than we've stated here.
6262 You should read section
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6269 reference "sec:Nesting"
6273 to learn more about nesting.
6276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6278 \begin_inset Index idx
6281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6290 \begin_layout Standard
6291 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6295 list has no fixed label.
6296 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6305 of the first line as the label.
6309 \begin_layout Description
6310 Example: This is an example of the
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6319 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6323 \begin_layout Standard
6325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6332 it is meant that the first usage of the
6336 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6338 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6346 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6352 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6354 \begin_inset space ~
6360 \begin_inset space ~
6364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6366 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6370 for more information.) Here is an example:
6373 \begin_layout Description
6375 \begin_inset space ~
6378 Example: This one shows how to use a
6381 \begin_inset space ~
6393 \begin_layout Description
6394 Usage: You should use the
6398 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6399 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6401 It's not a good idea to use a
6405 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6406 You're better off using
6418 paragraphs into them.
6421 \begin_layout Description
6422 Nesting: You can nest
6426 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6430 \begin_layout Standard
6431 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6432 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6433 them from the first line.
6436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6438 \begin_inset Index idx
6441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6450 \begin_layout Standard
6455 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6456 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6460 \begin_layout Standard
6469 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6471 Here are its properties:
6474 \begin_layout Labeling
6475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6477 \begin_inset space ~
6480 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 of each line as the item label.
6494 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6495 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6496 space as described above.
6499 \begin_layout Labeling
6500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6501 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6502 uses different margins for the item label and the
6503 body of the item text.
6504 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6505 label width plus a little extra space.
6509 \begin_layout Labeling
6510 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6512 \begin_inset space ~
6515 width \SpecialChar LyX
6516 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6517 If the label width is larger, the label
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 into the first line.
6526 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6527 margin of the rest of the item text.
6530 \begin_layout Labeling
6531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6533 \begin_inset space ~
6536 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6541 environment has the same left margin.
6542 \begin_inset Newline newline
6545 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6550 \begin_inset space ~
6555 dialog (toolbar button
6558 arg "layout-paragraph"
6565 \begin_inset space ~
6570 determines the default label width.
6571 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6580 multiple times instead.
6581 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6591 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6594 \begin_inset space ~
6599 every time you alter a label in a
6604 \begin_inset Newline newline
6607 The predefined default width is the length of
6608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6616 \begin_inset space ~
6622 \begin_layout Standard
6627 list the same way as the
6631 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6637 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6641 \begin_layout Standard
6646 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6647 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6649 \begin_inset space ~
6653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6655 reference "sec:Nesting"
6659 to learn about nesting.
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 There is yet another feature of the
6667 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6668 left-justifies the item labels by
6670 You can use additional
6674 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6675 justifies the item label.
6680 are documented in section
6681 \begin_inset space ~
6685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6687 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6692 Here are some examples:
6695 \begin_layout Labeling
6696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6697 Left The default for
6704 \begin_layout Labeling
6705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6706 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6713 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6716 \begin_layout Labeling
6717 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6718 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6722 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6729 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6732 \begin_layout Subsection
6734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6736 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6741 \begin_inset Index idx
6744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6753 \begin_layout Standard
6754 The features described in this section require that the module
6756 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6758 is loaded in the document settings.
6759 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6765 \begin_inset Index idx
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6779 Custom Enumerate Lists
6780 \begin_inset Index idx
6783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6784 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6794 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6797 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6800 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6801 There you add the command
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6812 \begin_layout Standard
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6825 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6826 Code, look at section
6827 \begin_inset space ~
6831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6833 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6846 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6853 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6854 For capital Roman numerals replace
6866 in the command above.
6867 For Arabic numerals use
6875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6882 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6897 \begin_layout Standard
6899 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 You can only number 26
6908 \begin_inset space ~
6911 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6919 \begin_layout Standard
6920 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6921 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6924 \begin_layout Standard
6925 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Enumerate
6959 \begin_inset Argument 1
6962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6985 \begin_layout Enumerate
6990 \begin_layout Enumerate
6991 \begin_inset Argument 1
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 \begin_layout Enumerate
7019 \begin_inset Argument 1
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 For this list these commands were used:
7052 \begin_layout Standard
7063 \begin_inset Newline newline
7071 \begin_inset Newline newline
7079 \begin_inset Newline newline
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7096 makes the label emphasized and
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7106 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7114 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7115 lists until you change the definition.
7123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7125 \begin_inset Index idx
7128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7129 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7138 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7142 \begin_inset Argument 1
7145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7164 \begin_inset Note Note
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7168 goes back to default numbering
7176 \begin_layout Enumerate
7180 \begin_layout Standard
7184 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7188 \begin_layout Standard
7189 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7194 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7195 to indicate that it is a resumed
7196 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7197 , but in the output.
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7209 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7218 \begin_layout Standard
7219 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7221 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7222 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7223 of a normal enumeration.
7224 There, insert the command
7227 \begin_layout Standard
7233 \begin_layout Standard
7238 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7242 \begin_layout Enumerate
7246 \begin_layout Enumerate
7250 \begin_layout Standard
7251 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7254 \begin_layout Enumerate
7255 \begin_inset Argument 1
7258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 This enumeration starts at 4
7277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7279 \begin_inset Index idx
7282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7292 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7294 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7297 \begin_layout Itemize
7301 \begin_layout Itemize
7302 with standard spacing
7305 \begin_layout Standard
7306 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7308 Add there the command
7312 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7315 \begin_layout Itemize
7316 \begin_inset Argument 1
7319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7338 \begin_layout Itemize
7342 \begin_layout Itemize
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7347 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7354 \begin_inset Index idx
7357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7365 For more information see its documentation,
7366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7377 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7379 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7380 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7384 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7387 \begin_layout Enumerate
7388 \begin_inset Argument 1
7391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7399 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7412 \begin_layout Enumerate
7413 with negative indentation
7416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7417 Further Customization
7418 \begin_inset Index idx
7421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7422 Lists ! Customization
7430 \begin_layout Standard
7431 You can also change the style of description lists.
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7441 \begin_layout Standard
7442 changes the description label font, the command
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7451 \begin_layout Standard
7452 sets the list style.
7455 \begin_layout Standard
7456 An example where the command
7459 \begin_layout Standard
7464 itshape, style=nextline
7467 \begin_layout Standard
7471 \begin_layout Description
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7477 \begin_inset Argument 1
7480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7486 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7488 itshape, style=nextline
7498 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7499 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7503 \begin_layout Description
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7508 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7509 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7510 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7520 \begin_inset Index idx
7523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7531 For more information see its documentation
7532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7542 \begin_layout Subsection
7544 \begin_inset Index idx
7547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7558 \begin_inset space ~
7561 Address: An Overview
7564 \begin_layout Standard
7565 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7566 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7574 \begin_inset space ~
7580 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7581 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7582 gags on the document.
7583 In contrast, you can use the
7590 \begin_inset space ~
7595 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7596 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7600 \begin_layout Standard
7601 Of course, you're not limited to using
7608 \begin_inset space ~
7617 \begin_inset space ~
7622 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7623 some European academic papers.
7626 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7630 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7637 \begin_layout Standard
7642 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7643 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7652 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7653 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7654 Here's an example of each:
7657 \begin_layout Right Address
7659 \begin_inset Newline newline
7663 \begin_inset Newline newline
7667 \begin_inset Newline newline
7670 When is it? What is today?
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7677 \begin_inset space ~
7683 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7685 the largest block of text on a single line.
7686 Here's an example of the
7693 \begin_layout Address
7695 \begin_inset Newline newline
7698 Where do I send this
7699 \begin_inset Newline newline
7702 Your post office and country
7705 \begin_layout Standard
7706 As you can see, both
7713 \begin_inset space ~
7718 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7723 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7724 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7730 This makes sense, since
7738 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7739 Thus, you have to use
7746 arg "newline-insert newline"
7751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7752 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7754 \begin_inset space ~
7758 \begin_inset space ~
7763 ) to start a new line in an
7770 \begin_inset space ~
7778 \begin_layout Subsection
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7783 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7784 or list of references.
7786 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7791 \begin_inset Index idx
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7808 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7809 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7810 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7811 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7825 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7826 The book document classes ignores the
7830 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7834 in a letter document class.
7837 \begin_layout Standard
7842 environment does several things for you.
7843 First, it puts the centered label
7844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7852 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7854 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7855 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7856 the subsequent text.
7857 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7859 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7863 \begin_layout Standard
7864 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7868 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7869 The new paragraph will still be in the
7874 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7875 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7878 \begin_layout Standard
7879 \begin_inset Float figure
7886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7888 \begin_inset Graphics
7889 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7897 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7902 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7924 We would love to demonstrate the
7928 environment, but since this document is in the
7929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7936 class, we can't do this.
7937 We inserted it therefore as figure
7938 \begin_inset space ~
7942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7944 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7949 If you have never heard of an
7950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7957 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7962 \begin_inset Index idx
7965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7974 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7986 environment is used to list references.
7987 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7988 only use it at the end of the document.
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8001 When you first open a
8005 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8006 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8022 depending on the document class.
8023 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8024 Each paragraph of the
8028 environment is a bibliography entry.
8033 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8034 Each new paragraph is still in the
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8042 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8043 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8045 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8047 handling, have a look at section
8048 \begin_inset space ~
8052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8054 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8061 \begin_layout Subsection
8062 Special Environments
8065 \begin_layout Standard
8067 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8068 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8076 \begin_inset Index idx
8079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8089 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8096 \begin_layout Standard
8102 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8104 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8109 key as a fixed whitespace.
8113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8126 \begin_inset space ~
8131 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8149 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8152 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8155 arg "newline-insert newline"
8172 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8173 So, when you finish using the
8178 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8179 Also, you can nest the
8184 environment inside of others.
8187 \begin_layout Standard
8188 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8191 \begin_layout Itemize
8195 arg "newline-insert newline"
8198 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8203 \begin_inset space \space{}
8213 arg "newline-insert newline"
8219 \begin_layout Itemize
8223 arg "newline-insert newline"
8233 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8239 \begin_layout Itemize
8240 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8241 You must put at least one
8245 in any line you want blank.
8246 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8251 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8255 since that will insert
8260 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8263 arg "self-insert \""
8269 \begin_layout Standard
8273 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8277 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8281 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8285 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8289 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8290 printf("Hello World!
8295 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8299 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 This is just the standard
8305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8316 \begin_layout Standard
8322 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8324 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8325 as if you used a typewriter.
8326 \begin_inset Index idx
8329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8330 Paragraph environments|)
8335 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8338 Program Code Listings
8343 \begin_inset space ~
8351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8355 \begin_inset Index idx
8358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8367 \begin_layout Standard
8372 environment is similar to the
8377 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8378 computer console text.
8383 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8397 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8398 you can have empty lines.
8411 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 have a certain language and a text style
8415 \begin_layout Itemize
8416 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8417 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8418 and \SpecialChar TeX
8422 \begin_layout Standard
8423 Because of these properties
8427 works like a typewriter.
8431 \begin_layout Verbatim
8436 \begin_layout Verbatim
8440 The following 2 lines are empty:
8443 \begin_layout Verbatim
8447 \begin_layout Verbatim
8451 \begin_layout Verbatim
8453 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8458 \begin_layout Standard
8463 environment is identical to
8467 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8468 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8475 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8480 \begin_layout Section
8481 Nesting Environments
8482 \begin_inset Index idx
8485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8486 Nesting ! Environments
8492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8501 \begin_layout Subsection
8505 \begin_layout Standard
8507 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8509 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8511 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8513 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8525 \begin_layout Enumerate
8529 \begin_layout Enumerate
8534 \begin_layout Enumerate
8538 \begin_layout Enumerate
8543 \begin_layout Enumerate
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8549 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8551 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8553 \begin_inset space ~
8557 \begin_inset space ~
8565 \begin_inset space ~
8569 \begin_inset space ~
8574 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8576 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8579 arg "depth-increment"
8585 arg "depth-decrement"
8599 arg "depth-increment"
8605 arg "depth-decrement"
8609 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8610 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8614 \begin_layout Standard
8615 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8616 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8617 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8618 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8619 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8622 \begin_layout Standard
8623 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8625 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8627 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8630 \begin_layout Subsection
8631 What You Can and Can't Nest
8634 \begin_layout Standard
8635 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8636 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8639 \begin_layout Standard
8640 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8641 than a simple yes or no.
8642 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 Completely unnestable
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8659 \begin_layout Standard
8660 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8661 environments have them:
8664 \begin_layout Description
8665 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8666 Can't nest into them.
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Description
8703 \begin_inset space ~
8706 Nestable You can nest them.
8707 You can nest other things into them.
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8766 \begin_layout Itemize
8773 \begin_layout Description
8774 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8775 You can't nest anything into them.
8779 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 \begin_layout Itemize
8791 \begin_layout Itemize
8797 \begin_layout Itemize
8803 \begin_layout Itemize
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Itemize
8857 \begin_layout Itemize
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8867 \begin_layout Itemize
8874 \begin_layout Standard
8875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8883 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8893 \begin_inset space ~
8896 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8897 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8898 nested section headings violate this.
8906 \begin_layout Subsection
8907 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8908 \begin_inset Index idx
8911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8912 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8920 \begin_layout Standard
8921 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8922 affected by nesting anyhow.
8926 \begin_layout Itemize
8930 \begin_layout Itemize
8934 \begin_layout Itemize
8938 \begin_layout Standard
8940 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8948 Figures and tables in
8952 are not affected by this.
8957 Have a look at section
8958 \begin_inset space ~
8962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8964 reference "sec:Floats"
8968 for more information about
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8977 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8978 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8991 of its own, it behaves just like a
8992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8999 paragraph environment.
9000 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9004 \begin_layout Standard
9005 Here's an example with a table:
9008 \begin_layout Enumerate
9013 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 This is (a) and it's nested.
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9027 \begin_inset Tabular
9028 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9029 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9030 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9031 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9115 \begin_layout Standard
9116 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9123 \begin_layout Enumerate
9125 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9129 \begin_layout Enumerate
9133 \begin_layout Standard
9134 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9137 \begin_layout Enumerate
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9143 This is (a) and it's nested.
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9156 \begin_inset Tabular
9157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9158 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 \begin_layout Standard
9245 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9251 \begin_layout Enumerate
9258 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9261 \begin_layout Enumerate
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9270 \begin_layout Standard
9271 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9274 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9277 \begin_layout Enumerate
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9283 This is (a) and it's nested.
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9295 \begin_inset Tabular
9296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9297 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9384 \begin_layout Standard
9385 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9391 \begin_layout Enumerate
9393 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9400 \begin_layout Enumerate
9404 \begin_layout Standard
9405 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9411 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9412 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9416 \begin_layout Subsection
9417 Usage and General Features
9420 \begin_layout Standard
9421 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9422 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9431 is the innermost possible depth.
9432 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9435 \begin_layout Enumerate
9436 level #1 – outermost
9440 \begin_layout Enumerate
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9455 \begin_layout Itemize
9460 \begin_layout Itemize
9469 \begin_layout Standard
9470 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9471 both of them in the example.
9472 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9482 For example, if we tried to nest another
9487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9494 , we would get errors.
9497 \begin_layout Subsection
9499 \begin_inset Index idx
9502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9511 \begin_layout Standard
9512 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9513 We have several examples of nested environments.
9514 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9518 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9519 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9522 \begin_layout Labeling
9523 \labelwidthstring MMM
9524 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9533 \begin_layout Labeling
9534 \labelwidthstring MMM
9535 #2-a This is level #2.
9536 We created it by using
9539 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9545 arg "depth-increment"
9552 \begin_layout Labeling
9553 \labelwidthstring MMM
9554 #3-a This is level #3.
9555 This time, we just enter
9562 arg "depth-increment"
9566 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9570 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9576 arg "depth-increment"
9583 \begin_layout Standard
9588 environment, nested inside of
9589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9597 So, it's at level #4.
9598 We did this by entering
9601 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9607 arg "depth-increment"
9610 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9615 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9631 \begin_layout Standard
9636 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9639 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9645 \begin_layout Labeling
9646 \labelwidthstring MMM
9647 #4-a This is level #4.
9651 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9654 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9659 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9663 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9668 keep nesting things inside
9669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9680 \begin_layout Labeling
9681 \labelwidthstring MMM
9682 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9687 \begin_layout Labeling
9688 \labelwidthstring MMM
9689 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9690 and this is level #6.
9691 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9695 \begin_layout Labeling
9696 \labelwidthstring MMM
9697 #5-b Back to level #5.
9701 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9707 arg "depth-decrement"
9714 \begin_layout Labeling
9715 \labelwidthstring MMM
9719 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9725 arg "depth-decrement"
9728 , we're back at level #4.
9732 \begin_layout Labeling
9733 \labelwidthstring MMM
9734 #3-b Back to level #3.
9735 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9739 \begin_layout Labeling
9740 \labelwidthstring MMM
9741 #2-b Back to level #2.
9746 \begin_layout Labeling
9747 \labelwidthstring MMM
9748 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9749 After this sentence, we will enter
9753 and change the paragraph environment back to
9760 \begin_layout Standard
9761 We could have also used the
9777 environment in place of the
9782 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9786 Example 2: Inheritance
9789 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9790 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9793 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9802 arg "depth-increment"
9806 \begin_inset Newline newline
9809 which, we will change to the
9817 \begin_layout Enumerate
9822 environment, at level #2.
9825 \begin_layout Enumerate
9826 Notice how the nested
9830 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9834 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9838 \begin_layout Standard
9839 We ended this example by entering
9844 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9848 and reset the nesting depth by using
9851 arg "depth-decrement"
9857 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9858 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9867 \begin_inset Argument 1
9870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9871 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9879 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 This is level #1, in an
9884 paragraph environment.
9885 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9889 \begin_layout Enumerate
9894 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9900 arg "depth-increment"
9904 Now, what happens if we nest an
9908 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9909 label be? An asterisk?
9913 \begin_layout Itemize
9923 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9924 So, its label is a bullet.
9925 (We got here by using
9928 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9934 arg "depth-increment"
9937 , then changing the environment to
9945 \begin_layout Itemize
9946 Here's level #4, produced using
9949 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9955 arg "depth-increment"
9959 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9964 \begin_layout Enumerate
9967 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9972 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9976 , because we are in the
9984 environment (that is, it is an
9999 \begin_layout Enumerate
10004 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10005 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10009 \begin_layout Enumerate
10010 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10013 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10016 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10019 \begin_layout Enumerate
10023 arg "depth-decrement"
10026 to decrease the depth after the next
10029 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10036 \begin_layout Enumerate
10038 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10043 \begin_layout Enumerate
10045 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10046 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10060 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10065 reset the counter for the label.
10069 \begin_layout Enumerate
10073 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10079 arg "depth-decrement"
10082 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10083 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10084 into the twofold-nested
10092 \begin_layout Enumerate
10093 The same thing happens if we do another
10096 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10102 arg "depth-decrement"
10105 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10108 \begin_layout Standard
10109 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10114 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10125 The number of other
10129 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10136 The same rule applies for the
10140 environment, as well.
10143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10144 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10147 \begin_layout Enumerate
10148 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10149 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10150 the same detail with how we did it.
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10167 arg "depth-increment"
10174 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10175 the example in parentheses someplace.
10176 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10177 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10178 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10182 \begin_layout Enumerate
10187 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10191 \begin_layout Verse
10192 Now we will add verse.
10193 \begin_inset Newline newline
10196 It will get much worse.
10197 \begin_inset Newline newline
10207 arg "depth-increment"
10217 \begin_layout Verse
10218 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10219 \begin_inset Newline newline
10222 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10223 \begin_inset Newline newline
10229 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10237 \begin_layout Verse
10238 Here comes a table:
10242 \begin_layout Standard
10243 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10249 \begin_layout Standard
10251 \begin_inset Tabular
10252 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10253 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10254 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10340 \begin_layout Verse
10344 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10354 arg "depth-increment"
10360 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10366 \begin_inset Newline newline
10374 arg "depth-decrement"
10381 \begin_layout Enumerate
10386 : level #1) This is another item.
10387 Note that selecting a
10391 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10392 3 times to put the table inside the
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 We're now ending the
10405 list and changing to
10410 We're still at level #1.
10411 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10412 The next set of paragraphs is a
10413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10420 We will nest both the
10427 \begin_inset space ~
10432 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10436 for the letter body.
10440 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10443 to preserve the depth.
10444 Remember that you need to use
10447 arg "newline-insert newline"
10450 to create multiple lines inside the
10457 \begin_inset space ~
10467 \begin_layout Right Address
10469 \begin_inset Newline newline
10472 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10473 \begin_inset Newline newline
10479 \begin_layout Address
10481 \begin_inset space ~
10487 \begin_layout Quotation
10488 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10492 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10493 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10494 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10495 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10496 as soon as possible.
10497 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10500 \begin_layout Quotation
10501 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10502 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10503 with your order, along with payment.
10506 \begin_layout Quotation
10507 We thank you again for your patience.
10510 \begin_layout Address
10512 \begin_inset Newline newline
10519 \begin_layout Quotation
10520 That ends that example!
10523 \begin_layout Standard
10524 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10525 gives you a lot of power with just
10527 We could have easily nested an
10548 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10551 \begin_layout Subsection
10553 \begin_inset Index idx
10556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10557 Nesting ! Separation
10563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10565 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10572 \begin_layout Standard
10573 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10575 For example you need two different enumerations:
10578 \begin_layout Enumerate
10583 \begin_layout Enumerate
10588 \begin_layout Enumerate
10592 \begin_layout Standard
10593 \begin_inset Separator plain
10599 \begin_layout Itemize
10605 \begin_layout Standard
10606 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10612 \begin_layout Enumerate
10616 \begin_layout Enumerate
10620 \begin_layout Enumerate
10624 \begin_layout Standard
10625 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10626 list item and use the menu
10628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10629 Separated <Name> Above
10633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10634 Separated <Name> Below
10637 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10638 ) and before or behind it the
10640 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10643 \begin_layout Standard
10644 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10645 (red arrow in LyX).
10646 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10647 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10650 \begin_layout Standard
10651 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10654 arg "paragraph-break"
10661 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10664 \begin_layout Section
10665 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10666 \begin_inset Index idx
10669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10679 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10680 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10682 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10683 be broken at the end of a line.
10684 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10688 \begin_layout Subsection
10690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10692 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10697 \begin_inset Index idx
10700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10709 \begin_layout Standard
10710 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10711 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10712 ) not to break the line at
10714 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10717 \begin_layout Quote
10718 Further documentation is given in section
10719 \begin_inset Newline newline
10723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10725 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10749 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10758 A protected space is set with
10760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10761 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10763 \begin_inset space ~
10771 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10777 \begin_layout Subsection
10779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10781 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10786 \begin_inset Index idx
10789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10790 Spacing ! Horizontal
10798 \begin_layout Standard
10799 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10802 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10806 The length units are listed in Appendix
10807 \begin_inset space ~
10811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10813 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10820 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10824 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10829 \begin_inset Index idx
10832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10833 Spaces ! Inter-word
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10843 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10844 at the ends of sentences.
10845 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10846 automatically takes care about this.
10847 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10848 followed by a period; see section
10849 \begin_inset space ~
10853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10855 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10860 To insert a normal space, select
10862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10873 arg "space-insert normal"
10879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10883 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10888 \begin_inset Index idx
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10909 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10918 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10919 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10920 inside abbreviations:
10923 \begin_layout Quote
10925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10929 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10932 \begin_layout Standard
10933 or between values and units.
10934 Compare for example this:
10935 \begin_inset Newline newline
10939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10943 \begin_inset Newline newline
10946 10 kg (normal space
10949 \begin_layout Standard
10950 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10953 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10963 arg "space-insert thin"
10969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10973 \begin_layout Standard
10974 You can also insert the following space types:
10977 \begin_layout Description
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space ~
10986 space A line with a
10987 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10991 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10998 negative thin space between the arrows.
11001 \begin_layout Description
11003 \begin_inset space ~
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11010 space A line with a
11011 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11015 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11019 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11022 negative medium space between the arrows.
11025 \begin_layout Description
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space ~
11034 space A line with a
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11039 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 negative thick space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11067 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11071 \begin_inset space ~
11075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11078 em) space between the arrows.
11081 \begin_layout Description
11083 \begin_inset space ~
11087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11091 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11095 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11099 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11103 \begin_inset space ~
11107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11110 em) space between the arrows.
11113 \begin_layout Description
11115 \begin_inset space ~
11119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11123 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11127 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11131 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11135 \begin_inset space ~
11139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11142 em) space between the arrows.
11145 \begin_layout Description
11147 \begin_inset space ~
11151 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11155 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11160 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11167 cm space between the arrows.
11170 \begin_layout Standard
11172 \begin_inset space ~
11176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11178 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11182 lists the different space sizes.
11185 \begin_layout Standard
11186 \begin_inset Float table
11193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11199 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11203 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11213 \begin_inset Tabular
11214 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11215 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11216 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11217 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11333 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11492 \begin_inset Index idx
11495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11504 \begin_layout Standard
11505 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11506 feature for adding extra space
11507 in a uniform fashion.
11508 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11509 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11510 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11511 equally between themselves.
11514 \begin_layout Standard
11515 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11518 \begin_layout Quote
11520 This is on the left side
11521 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11524 This is on the right
11527 \begin_layout Quote
11530 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11534 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11540 \begin_layout Quote
11543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11547 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11551 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 That was an example in the
11564 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11568 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11572 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11575 is one in a standard paragraph.
11576 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11580 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11583 \begin_layout Standard
11584 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11587 \begin_inset space ~
11592 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11595 \begin_layout Standard
11597 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11601 \begin_inset space ~
11607 \begin_layout Standard
11609 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11613 \begin_inset space ~
11619 \begin_layout Standard
11621 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11625 \begin_inset space ~
11631 \begin_layout Standard
11633 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11643 \begin_layout Standard
11645 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11649 \begin_inset space ~
11655 \begin_layout Standard
11657 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11661 \begin_inset space ~
11667 \begin_layout Standard
11668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11676 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11680 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11682 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11683 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11687 option in the space dialog.
11695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11699 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11704 \begin_inset Index idx
11707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11717 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11718 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11722 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11725 What is correct English?:
11726 \begin_inset Newline newline
11730 \begin_inset Newline newline
11734 \begin_inset space ~
11737 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11738 \begin_inset Newline newline
11742 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11753 \begin_inset Newline newline
11757 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11774 \begin_layout Standard
11776 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11785 \begin_inset space ~
11789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11793 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11796 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11800 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11806 \begin_inset space ~
11810 \begin_inset space ~
11814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11817 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11826 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11827 That is why it is named
11828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11836 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11837 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11841 \begin_layout Subsection
11843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11845 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11850 \begin_inset Index idx
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11862 \begin_layout Standard
11863 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11866 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11868 \begin_inset space ~
11874 There you find the following sizes:
11877 \begin_layout Standard
11890 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11891 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11896 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11899 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11901 \begin_inset space ~
11907 \begin_inset Index idx
11910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11911 Document ! Settings
11916 for the paragraph separation.
11917 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11928 \begin_layout Standard
11934 \begin_inset Index idx
11937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11944 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11949 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11950 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11959 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11968 s are described in section
11969 \begin_inset space ~
11973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11975 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11984 If there are several
11988 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11989 You can therefore use
11993 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11996 \begin_layout Standard
12001 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12002 \begin_inset space ~
12006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12008 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12015 \begin_layout Standard
12016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12026 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12027 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12039 \begin_layout Subsection
12040 Paragraph Alignment
12041 \begin_inset Index idx
12044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12045 Paragraph ! Alignment
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12054 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12056 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12059 dialog (toolbar button
12062 arg "layout-paragraph"
12066 There are five possibilities:
12069 \begin_layout Itemize
12077 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12083 \begin_layout Itemize
12091 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12097 \begin_layout Itemize
12105 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12111 \begin_layout Itemize
12119 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12125 \begin_layout Itemize
12133 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12140 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12141 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12142 the left and right margins.
12143 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12146 \begin_layout Standard
12148 This paragraph is right aligned,
12151 \begin_layout Standard
12153 this one is centered,
12156 \begin_layout Standard
12158 this one is left aligned.
12161 \begin_layout Subsection
12163 \begin_inset Index idx
12166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12167 Page breaks ! Forced
12173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12175 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12184 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12185 force a page break where you want one.
12186 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12187 is good at page breaking.
12188 Only if you use a lot of
12192 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12193 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12196 \begin_layout Standard
12197 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12198 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12202 have to change the page breaking.
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12206 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12208 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12211 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12219 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12222 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12224 \begin_inset space ~
12229 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12231 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12232 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12235 \begin_layout Standard
12236 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12237 at the top of a page.
12238 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12240 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12241 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12242 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12246 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12250 to learn more about
12257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12261 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12266 \begin_inset Index idx
12269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12270 Page breaks ! Clear
12278 \begin_layout Standard
12279 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12280 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12281 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12282 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12283 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12286 \begin_layout Standard
12287 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12290 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12292 \begin_inset space ~
12298 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12301 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12312 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12313 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12316 \begin_layout Subsection
12318 \begin_inset Index idx
12321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12330 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12337 \begin_layout Standard
12338 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12340 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 \begin_inset space ~
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12357 arg "newline-insert newline"
12361 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12364 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12366 \begin_inset space ~
12370 \begin_inset space ~
12378 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12381 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12383 This is useful to avoid
12384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12391 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12394 \begin_layout Standard
12395 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12396 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12398 very good at line breaking.
12399 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12400 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12401 \begin_inset space ~
12405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12407 reference "sec:Quote"
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "sec:Verse"
12419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12421 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12428 \begin_layout Subsection
12430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12432 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12437 \begin_inset Index idx
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12449 \begin_layout Standard
12451 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12462 \begin_layout Standard
12466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12467 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12469 \begin_inset space ~
12474 you can insert horizontal lines.
12475 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12476 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12477 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12493 \begin_layout Section
12494 Characters and Symbols
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12498 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12499 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12500 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12508 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12512 for information on how this is done.
12515 \begin_layout Standard
12516 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12521 dialog via the menu
12523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12524 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12530 \begin_layout Standard
12531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12539 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12540 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12542 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12550 \begin_layout Section
12551 Fonts and Text Styles
12552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12554 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12561 \begin_layout Subsection
12563 \begin_inset Index idx
12566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12575 \begin_layout Standard
12576 There are two types of fonts:
12579 \begin_layout Description
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12585 \begin_inset Index idx
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12594 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12599 characters) in the font.
12600 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12601 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12602 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12603 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12604 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12605 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12606 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12607 \begin_inset Newline newline
12610 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12611 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12612 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12613 sizes than at small ones.
12614 \begin_inset Newline newline
12628 \begin_inset space ~
12636 \begin_layout Description
12638 \begin_inset space ~
12642 \begin_inset Index idx
12645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12651 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12652 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12653 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12654 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12655 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12656 image manipulation program.
12657 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12658 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12662 pixels high up to 34
12663 \begin_inset space ~
12666 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12667 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12668 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12670 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12671 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12672 \begin_inset Newline newline
12675 Bitmap fonts are named
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12683 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12686 \begin_layout Standard
12687 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12688 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12689 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12690 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12691 use scalable fonts.
12694 \begin_layout Standard
12695 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12698 \begin_layout Standard
12699 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12701 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12706 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12707 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12708 font to emphasize text, you use an
12709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12717 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12719 In \SpecialChar LyX
12720 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12724 \begin_layout Subsection
12727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12729 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12737 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12738 used its own fonts.
12739 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12740 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12743 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12744 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12745 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12746 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12747 to a word processor.
12748 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12749 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12750 files are very portable across
12751 different machines.
12752 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12753 has increased a lot
12754 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12757 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12765 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12770 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12771 code in the document
12772 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12775 \begin_layout Standard
12776 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12777 engines that are also able directly
12778 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12780 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12782 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12784 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12785 that is installed on your system.
12786 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12789 \begin_layout Standard
12790 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12798 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12799 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12807 \begin_layout Subsection
12808 Document Font and Font size
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12811 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12816 \begin_inset Index idx
12819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12826 \begin_inset Index idx
12829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12838 \begin_layout Standard
12839 You can set the document fonts in the
12841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12845 \begin_inset Index idx
12848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12849 Document ! Settings
12859 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12860 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12863 \begin_inset space ~
12872 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12877 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12880 \begin_layout Standard
12885 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12886 This requires that you use
12898 as the output format, i.
12899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12903 \begin_inset space \space{}
12906 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12907 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12908 installed (see section
12909 \begin_inset space ~
12913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12915 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12920 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12922 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12923 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12925 \begin_inset space ~
12928 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12929 cannot determine the family.
12930 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12931 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12934 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12937 \begin_layout Standard
12938 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12939 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12944 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12950 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12952 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12954 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12957 font encoding, this is
12958 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12959 , depending on the document language,
12962 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12963 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12987 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12988 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12996 \begin_inset space ~
13002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13010 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13031 European Computer Modern
13034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13042 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13045 \begin_layout Standard
13050 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13051 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13056 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13064 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13070 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13071 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13074 \begin_layout Itemize
13078 \begin_inset space ~
13083 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13101 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13102 community in order to replace
13106 as the default font.
13107 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13108 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13111 \begin_inset space ~
13124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13125 One difference is improved kerning.
13133 \begin_layout Itemize
13134 If you do not like the look of
13142 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13163 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13167 serif and typewriter fonts,
13171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13172 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13188 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13193 \begin_inset space \space{}
13201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13205 \begin_inset space \space{}
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13219 \begin_inset space ~
13229 but you can also select your own.
13230 \begin_inset Newline newline
13233 The differences between roman,
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13245 fonts are explained in section
13246 \begin_inset space ~
13250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13252 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13257 \begin_inset Newline newline
13263 \begin_inset space ~
13268 was originally designed for newspapers.
13269 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13270 into the small newspaper columns.
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13279 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13296 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13301 depends on the class you are using.
13302 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13306 Note that the font size is the
13311 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13312 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13313 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13314 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13323 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13324 \begin_inset space ~
13328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13330 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13337 \begin_layout Standard
13341 \begin_inset space ~
13346 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13348 \begin_inset space ~
13351 serif or typewriter.
13356 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13366 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13369 \begin_layout Standard
13374 LaTeX font encoding
13376 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13377 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13383 \begin_inset Index idx
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13394 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13396 \begin_inset space ~
13400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13402 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13409 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13410 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13411 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13415 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13423 \begin_layout Standard
13424 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13426 Use Old Style Figures
13430 Use True Small Caps
13433 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13436 Use Old Style Figures
13438 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13440 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13448 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13452 Use True Small Caps
13454 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13455 of scaled capitals.
13456 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13457 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13460 \begin_layout Standard
13465 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13466 a font to display the script characters.
13470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13471 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13477 \begin_inset Index idx
13480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13487 So this has no effect for the document language
13503 \begin_layout Standard
13506 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13508 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13509 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13515 \begin_inset Index idx
13518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13520 packages ! microtype
13529 \begin_layout Standard
13532 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13534 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13539 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13540 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13546 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13547 \begin_inset space ~
13551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13553 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13563 \begin_layout Standard
13564 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13568 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13576 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13581 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13582 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13584 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13586 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13589 dialog, see section
13590 \begin_inset space ~
13594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13596 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13608 \begin_layout Subsection
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13613 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13614 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13616 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13617 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13618 choose a math font in the dialog
13620 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13624 \begin_inset Index idx
13627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13628 Document ! Settings
13634 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13635 automatically selects a math font.
13636 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13637 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13657 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13658 document font is available.
13661 \begin_layout Standard
13662 Note that the math font will not be used for
13666 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13672 or by the insertion of the command
13679 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13680 \begin_inset space ~
13684 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13685 while the math characters do not.
13687 \begin_inset space ~
13690 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13693 \begin_inset space ~
13701 \begin_inset space ~
13706 in the document font settings.
13709 \begin_layout Standard
13710 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13711 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13712 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13713 font (in most cases
13714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13720 \begin_inset space ~
13726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13729 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13730 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13738 \begin_inset space ~
13744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13750 \begin_layout Subsection
13752 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13754 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13758 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13762 name "subsec:charstyles"
13769 \begin_inset Index idx
13772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13779 \begin_inset Index idx
13782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13791 \begin_layout Standard
13792 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13793 automatically changes the
13794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13797 style for certain paragraph environments.
13799 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13800 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13802 This is where we meet the concept of
13808 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13821 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13845 e., available with all document classes.
13846 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13850 for specific purposes.
13851 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13854 \begin_layout Standard
13856 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13857 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13867 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13871 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13884 — you customized the
13889 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13890 among them, encourage the use of
13902 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13903 \begin_inset space ~
13907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13909 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13914 Rather than fiddling with
13918 , they encourage the use of
13922 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13927 \begin_inset Quotes els
13931 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13934 ), not their form (
13935 \begin_inset Quotes els
13939 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13943 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13944 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13945 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13946 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13947 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13948 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13954 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13958 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13959 With a semantic markup (such as
13963 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13968 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13970 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13971 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13974 \begin_layout Standard
13976 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13977 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13978 by \SpecialChar LyX
13984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13986 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13987 Builtin Text Styles
13988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13990 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13997 \begin_layout Standard
13999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14000 The two builtin text styles can be
14001 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14005 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14009 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14010 both of these styles
14013 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14021 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14027 \begin_layout Standard
14032 style, do one of the following:
14035 \begin_layout Itemize
14036 click on the toolbar button
14045 \begin_layout Itemize
14046 use the key binding
14053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14057 \begin_layout Itemize
14059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14067 arg "dialog-show character"
14073 arg "dialog-show character"
14076 ) as described in section
14077 \begin_inset space ~
14081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14083 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14092 \begin_layout Standard
14093 These commands are all toggles.
14098 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14101 \begin_layout Standard
14102 One typically uses the
14106 style for proper names.
14108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14115 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14125 \begin_layout Standard
14127 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14132 is producing text in
14136 , but the definition can be changed.
14141 \begin_layout Standard
14143 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14153 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14160 \begin_layout Itemize
14161 clicking on the toolbar button
14170 \begin_layout Itemize
14171 using the keybindings
14178 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14182 \begin_layout Itemize
14184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14192 arg "dialog-show character"
14198 arg "dialog-show character"
14201 ) as described in section
14202 \begin_inset space ~
14206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14208 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14217 \begin_layout Standard
14222 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14224 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14226 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14229 packages use a different font
14230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14231 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14237 \begin_layout Standard
14238 We've been using the
14242 style all over the place in this document.
14243 Here's one more example:
14246 \begin_layout Quotation
14250 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14258 \begin_layout Standard
14259 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14260 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14261 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14262 the common tendency to overuse
14263 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14265 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14274 \begin_layout Standard
14276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14277 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14278 only as font changes and integrated in the
14286 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14289 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14296 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14298 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14305 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14307 \begin_inset space ~
14310 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14312 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14318 arg "dialog-show character"
14324 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14326 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14332 arg "dialog-show character"
14336 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14346 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14353 \begin_layout Standard
14355 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14356 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14358 \begin_inset space ~
14362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14364 reference "subsec:Modules"
14371 ), or local layout settings (see section
14372 \begin_inset space ~
14376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14378 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14383 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14387 markup for specific functions.
14388 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14393 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14403 \begin_inset Quotes els
14407 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14413 \begin_layout Standard
14415 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14416 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14418 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14424 \begin_layout Standard
14426 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14427 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14432 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14433 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14434 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14439 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14440 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14445 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14453 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14454 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14455 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14456 \begin_inset Flex Code
14459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14461 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14470 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14475 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14484 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14489 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14498 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14499 on screen their formal appearance.
14504 \begin_layout Subsection
14506 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14508 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14518 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14526 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14528 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14534 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14539 \begin_inset Index idx
14542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14551 \begin_layout Standard
14552 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14553 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14556 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14558 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14565 the properties of text passages
14566 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14570 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14571 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14572 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14573 from ordinary dialog.
14574 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14578 \begin_layout Standard
14580 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14581 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14582 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14583 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14584 the properties of the respective text passages.
14589 comes in as a last resort.
14594 \begin_layout Standard
14595 Before we document how to
14596 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14597 use custom character style
14598 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14599 tweak the text properties
14601 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14602 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14604 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14608 \begin_inset Newline newline
14611 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14612 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14615 \begin_layout Standard
14617 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14618 use custom character styles
14619 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14620 tweak text properties
14623 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14626 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14628 \begin_inset space ~
14631 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14633 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14639 arg "dialog-show character"
14644 dialog or press the toolbar button
14647 arg "dialog-show character"
14652 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14655 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14656 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14661 property that you can choose.
14662 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14665 \begin_inset space ~
14670 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14676 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14678 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14683 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14684 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14685 environments all at once.
14688 \begin_layout Standard
14690 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14692 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14695 properties, and their options (in addition to
14698 \begin_inset space ~
14704 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14708 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14716 \begin_layout Labeling
14717 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14731 The possible options are:
14735 \begin_layout Labeling
14736 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14741 This is the Roman font family.
14742 Normally a serif font.
14743 It's also the default family.
14753 \begin_layout Labeling
14754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14758 \begin_inset space ~
14765 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14777 \begin_layout Labeling
14778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14785 This is the Typewriter font family.
14791 arg "font-typewriter"
14797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14801 \begin_layout Standard
14803 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14804 The general differences of these families are:
14807 \begin_layout Itemize
14809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14814 fonts use characters with serifs.
14815 These are the small
14816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14823 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14824 The following example shows the difference:
14825 \begin_inset Newline newline
14829 \begin_inset Newline newline
14834 text without serifs
14837 \begin_inset Newline newline
14840 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14841 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14848 \begin_layout Itemize
14850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14855 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14856 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14857 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14860 \begin_layout Itemize
14862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14875 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14893 \begin_inset Newline newline
14897 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14913 \begin_inset Note Note
14916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14919 For more on phantoms see section
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14926 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14936 \begin_inset Newline newline
14945 \begin_layout Labeling
14946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14951 This corresponds to the print weight.
14956 \begin_layout Labeling
14957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14962 This is the Medium font series.
14963 It's also the default series.
14966 \begin_layout Labeling
14967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14974 This is the Bold font series.
14987 \begin_layout Labeling
14988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14993 As the name implies.
14998 \begin_layout Labeling
14999 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15004 This is the Upright font shape.
15005 It's also the default shape.
15008 \begin_layout Labeling
15009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15019 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15024 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15029 s the Italic font shape
15035 \begin_layout Labeling
15036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15043 This is the Slanted font shape
15045 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15046 , this is different from italic).
15049 \begin_layout Labeling
15050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15054 \begin_inset space ~
15061 This is the Small caps font shape
15068 \begin_layout Labeling
15069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15074 Alters the text color.
15075 Note that not all DVI
15076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15081 viewers are able to display colors.
15083 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15087 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15089 \begin_inset space ~
15096 , which means that the document default color set in
15098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15099 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15105 \begin_inset space ~
15111 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15197 \begin_inset Index idx
15200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15209 \begin_layout Labeling
15210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15215 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15216 the language of the document.
15217 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15219 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15222 in blue to indicate the change
15223 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15224 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15228 \begin_inset Newline newline
15231 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15233 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15234 When using the spell checking (see section
15235 \begin_inset space ~
15239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15241 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15245 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15246 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15248 \begin_inset Newline newline
15251 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15253 Exclude from Spellchecking
15256 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15259 \begin_layout Labeling
15260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15265 Alters the size of the font.
15267 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15269 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15273 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15276 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15277 document font size.
15278 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15279 the details, but a general description of what
15285 \begin_layout Labeling
15286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15307 arg "font-size tiny"
15313 \begin_layout Labeling
15314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15335 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15341 \begin_layout Labeling
15342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15363 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15369 \begin_layout Labeling
15370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15391 arg "font-size small"
15397 \begin_layout Labeling
15398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15412 It's also the default size.
15416 arg "font-size normal"
15422 \begin_layout Labeling
15423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15444 arg "font-size large"
15450 \begin_layout Labeling
15451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15472 arg "font-size larger"
15478 \begin_layout Labeling
15479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15500 arg "font-size largest"
15506 \begin_layout Labeling
15507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15528 arg "font-size huge"
15534 \begin_layout Labeling
15535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15556 arg "font-size giant"
15562 \begin_layout Labeling
15563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15568 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15588 arg "font-size increase"
15594 \begin_layout Labeling
15595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15600 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15620 arg "font-size decrease"
15627 \begin_layout Standard
15632 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15633 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15635 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15636 — use those instead.
15637 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15640 \begin_layout Labeling
15641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15643 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15653 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15654 change a few other things at the character level
15655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15656 have text passages being underlined
15660 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15661 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15662 days, when you could not change fonts.
15663 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15664 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15665 because some people
15669 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15676 \begin_layout Labeling
15677 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15679 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15686 This is text with emphasize on
15689 This might seem like the same as
15693 , but it is actually a bit different.
15699 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15701 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15702 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15706 \begin_layout Labeling
15707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15709 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15714 Don't use underlining.
15719 \begin_layout Labeling
15720 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15722 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15726 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15734 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15736 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15745 arg "font-underline"
15751 \begin_inset Newline newline
15755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15758 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15759 when you could not change fonts.
15760 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15761 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15762 because some people
15766 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15771 \begin_layout Labeling
15772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15776 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15778 \begin_inset space ~
15787 This is text with Double under
15788 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15790 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15799 arg "font-underunderline"
15803 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15805 \begin_inset Newline newline
15808 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15809 about double underbar
15814 \begin_layout Labeling
15815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15819 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15821 \begin_inset space ~
15830 This is text with Wavy under
15831 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15833 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15842 arg "font-underwave"
15846 \begin_inset Newline newline
15849 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15850 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15856 \begin_layout Labeling
15857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15864 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15870 \begin_layout Labeling
15871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15873 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15878 Don't use strikethrough.
15881 \begin_layout Labeling
15882 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15886 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15892 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15900 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15903 Single strikethrough
15911 arg "font-strikeout"
15915 \begin_inset Newline newline
15918 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15919 changed in the meantime.
15922 \begin_layout Labeling
15923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15925 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15933 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15939 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15949 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15955 \begin_inset Newline newline
15958 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15962 \begin_layout Standard
15964 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15965 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15966 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15967 \begin_inset space ~
15971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15973 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15980 \begin_layout Itemize
15982 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15989 This is text with emphasize on
15994 \begin_layout Itemize
15998 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16005 This is text with Noun on.
16007 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16014 , this is a logical attribute.
16015 Normally it's equivalent to
16018 \begin_inset space ~
16028 \begin_layout Standard
16029 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16030 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16032 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16037 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16038 chosen a new character style
16039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16040 applied a text property
16043 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16046 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16048 \begin_inset space ~
16051 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16059 arg "dialog-show character"
16067 arg "dialog-show character"
16070 ) dialog, the settings are
16071 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16075 You can activate the
16076 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16078 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16079 last applied properties
16081 by using the toolbar button
16084 arg "textstyle-apply"
16088 The button lets you apply
16089 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16090 your custom character style
16091 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16094 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16096 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16097 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16098 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16099 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16104 \begin_layout Standard
16105 To completely reset the
16106 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16108 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16109 text properties of a selection
16111 to the default, use
16112 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16114 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16124 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16129 from the menu of the toolbar button
16132 arg "textstyle-apply"
16139 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16140 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16141 you just set the shape to
16142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16160 \begin_inset space ~
16174 \begin_layout Standard
16176 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16177 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16185 \begin_inset space ~
16197 \begin_layout Itemize
16199 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16212 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16230 \begin_inset Newline newline
16234 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16248 \begin_inset Note Note
16251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16252 For more on phantoms see section
16253 \begin_inset space ~
16257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16259 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16269 \begin_inset Newline newline
16275 \begin_layout Itemize
16277 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16282 fonts use characters with serifs.
16283 These are the small
16284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16291 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16292 The following example shows the difference:
16293 \begin_inset Newline newline
16297 \begin_inset Newline newline
16302 text without serifs
16305 \begin_inset Newline newline
16308 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16309 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16316 \begin_layout Itemize
16318 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16323 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16324 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16325 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16330 \begin_layout Standard
16332 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16340 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16341 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16344 \begin_inset space ~
16349 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16350 the property to be removed.
16351 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16352 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16353 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16371 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16372 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16380 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16384 \begin_inset space ~
16389 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16400 If you, for example, set
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16419 \begin_inset space ~
16424 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16433 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16438 \begin_layout Standard
16440 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16443 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16444 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16447 \begin_layout Section
16448 Printing and Previewing
16451 \begin_layout Subsection
16455 \begin_layout Standard
16456 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16457 using \SpecialChar LyX
16458 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16459 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16460 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16461 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16463 Additional Features
16468 \begin_layout Standard
16470 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16473 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16474 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16475 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16478 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16479 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16480 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16481 to turn your writing into printable output.
16482 This happens in two stages:
16485 \begin_layout Enumerate
16486 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16487 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16489 a file with the extension,
16490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16504 \begin_layout Enumerate
16505 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16506 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16507 to use the commands in the
16511 file to produce printable output.
16514 \begin_layout Subsection
16515 Output file formats
16516 \begin_inset Index idx
16519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16528 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16536 Simple text (ASCII)
16537 \begin_inset Index idx
16540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16541 File formats ! ASCII
16549 \begin_layout Standard
16550 This file type has the extension
16551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16563 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16567 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16574 \begin_layout Standard
16575 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16577 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16578 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16580 \begin_inset space ~
16586 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16587 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16588 bibliography (section
16589 \begin_inset space ~
16593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16595 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16600 If your document includes such material, use
16602 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16603 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 \begin_inset space ~
16609 \begin_inset space ~
16613 \begin_inset space ~
16621 \begin_inset space ~
16625 \begin_inset space ~
16631 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16632 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16638 \begin_inset Index idx
16641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16651 \begin_layout Standard
16652 This file type has the extension
16653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16664 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16667 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16668 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16669 -Errors or to process it manually
16670 with console commands.
16671 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16672 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16673 's temporary directory whenever you
16674 view or export your document.
16677 \begin_layout Standard
16678 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16679 -file using the menu
16681 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16682 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16686 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16687 export variants are explained in section
16688 \begin_inset space ~
16692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16694 reference "subsec:Export"
16701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16703 \begin_inset Index idx
16706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16715 \begin_layout Standard
16716 This file type has the extension
16717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16737 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16738 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16739 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16743 \begin_layout Standard
16744 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16745 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16746 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16747 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16748 when you view the DVI.
16749 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16752 \begin_layout Standard
16753 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16756 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16761 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16762 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16764 \begin_inset space ~
16770 The latter option uses the program
16772 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16778 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16781 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16782 font access (see section
16783 \begin_inset space ~
16787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16794 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16795 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16800 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16802 \begin_inset Index idx
16805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16806 File formats ! PostScript
16814 \begin_layout Standard
16815 This file type has the extension
16816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16828 PostScript was developed by the company
16832 as a printer language.
16833 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16835 PostScript can be seen as a
16836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 programming language
16840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16843 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16848 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16855 \begin_inset Index idx
16858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16860 packages ! pstricks
16870 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16873 \begin_layout Standard
16874 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16878 Encapsulated PostScript
16879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16882 (EPS, file extension
16883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16895 As \SpecialChar LyX
16896 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16897 convert them in the background to EPS.
16898 If, for example, you have 50
16899 \begin_inset space ~
16902 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16904 \begin_inset space ~
16907 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16908 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16910 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16911 EPS to avoid this problem.
16914 \begin_layout Standard
16915 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16917 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16918 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16926 \begin_inset Index idx
16929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16936 \begin_inset Index idx
16939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_layout Standard
16949 This file type has the extension
16950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16966 Portable Document Format
16967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16974 was derived from PostScript.
16975 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16984 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16985 looks exactly the same.
16988 \begin_layout Standard
16989 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16993 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16997 (JPG, file extension
16998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17025 Portable Network Graphics
17026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17029 (PNG, file extension
17030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17042 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17043 converts them in the
17044 background to one of these formats.
17045 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17046 will slow down your workflow.
17047 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17050 \begin_layout Standard
17051 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17053 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17059 \begin_layout Description
17061 \begin_inset space ~
17064 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17068 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17071 \begin_layout Description
17073 \begin_inset space ~
17080 ) This uses the program
17082 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17085 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17088 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17091 is a new engine, derived from
17095 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17096 access (see section
17097 \begin_inset space ~
17101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17103 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17108 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17109 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17114 \begin_layout Description
17116 \begin_inset space ~
17123 ) This uses the program
17128 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17134 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17135 font access (see section
17136 \begin_inset space ~
17140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17142 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17147 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17148 vertically written Japanese.
17151 \begin_layout Description
17153 \begin_inset space ~
17156 (cropped) This is the same as
17159 \begin_inset space ~
17164 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17165 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17166 to generate good-looking
17167 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17170 \begin_layout Description
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17175 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17179 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17183 \begin_layout Description
17185 \begin_inset space ~
17188 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17192 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17193 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17197 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17198 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17201 \begin_layout Standard
17205 \begin_inset space ~
17214 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17215 works without problems.
17216 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17217 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17221 \begin_inset space ~
17229 \begin_inset space ~
17234 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17244 \begin_inset Index idx
17247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17248 FileFormats ! XHTML
17254 \begin_inset Index idx
17257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17266 \begin_layout Standard
17267 This file type has the extension
17268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17280 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17281 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17282 When \SpecialChar LyX
17283 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17284 suitable for the purpose.
17285 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17291 between different formats, which are described in section
17293 Math Output in XHTML
17298 \begin_inset space ~
17306 \begin_layout Standard
17307 XHTML output remains
17308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17315 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17316 features are supported yet.
17320 and the World Wide Web
17324 Additional Features
17326 manual, for more information.
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17330 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17332 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17333 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17339 \begin_layout Subsection
17341 \begin_inset Index idx
17344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17353 \begin_layout Standard
17354 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17355 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17364 or use the toolbar button
17371 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17372 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17379 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17383 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17385 \begin_inset space ~
17389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17391 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17396 Further output formats can be selected via
17398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17399 View (Other Formats)
17401 or the toolbar button
17410 \begin_layout Standard
17411 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17412 viewer window using the menu
17414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17420 Update (Other Formats)
17425 \begin_layout Standard
17426 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17429 To have a real output, export your document.
17432 \begin_layout Section
17433 A few Words about Typography
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \begin_layout Subsection
17447 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17448 \begin_inset Index idx
17451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17458 \begin_inset Index idx
17461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17470 \begin_layout Standard
17471 In \SpecialChar LyX
17473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17484 symbol comes in four variants: the
17501 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17507 \begin_layout Standard
17508 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17518 height_special "totalheight"
17523 backgroundcolor "none"
17526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17527 \begin_inset Tabular
17528 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17529 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17530 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17531 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17532 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17533 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17562 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17563 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17602 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17625 system key combination
17629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17630 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17642 and the em dash with
17645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17658 is the Mac label for the right
17669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17682 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17705 system key combination or
17706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17733 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17772 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17778 \begin_layout Standard
17779 Dashes can also be inserted with
17781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17783 \begin_inset space ~
17786 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17794 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17795 and 2014 for the en dash).
17798 \begin_layout Standard
17799 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17800 mode and has a length of its own.
17801 Here are some examples:
17804 \begin_layout Enumerate
17805 line- and page-breaks
17806 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17816 \begin_layout Enumerate
17818 \begin_inset space ~
17822 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17832 \begin_layout Enumerate
17833 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17834 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17844 \begin_layout Enumerate
17845 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17849 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17859 \begin_layout Standard
17861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17863 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17864 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17872 \begin_layout Subsection
17873 Dashes and Line Breaks
17874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17876 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17883 \begin_layout Standard
17884 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17885 case and locale, e.
17886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17892 \begin_layout Itemize
17893 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17894 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17897 \begin_layout Itemize
17898 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17902 \begin_layout Itemize
17903 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17904 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17907 \begin_layout Standard
17908 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17909 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17920 allows line breaks after hyphens
17921 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17923 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
17926 en-dashes and em-dashes.
17929 \begin_layout Enumerate
17930 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17931 \begin_inset space ~
17934 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17936 The Elements of Typographic Style
17939 \begin_inset space ~
17942 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17945 \begin_layout Enumerate
17946 Unwanted line breaks
17951 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
17953 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
17956 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17963 Prevent Hyphenation
17968 \begin_inset space ~
17984 in \SpecialChar TeX
17986 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
17987 , a protected space does not suffice
17991 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
17996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
17999 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18000 in the document language.
18001 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18015 \begin_layout Itemize
18017 \begin_inset space ~
18021 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18031 height_special "totalheight"
18036 backgroundcolor "none"
18039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18048 \begin_layout Itemize
18050 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18060 height_special "totalheight"
18065 backgroundcolor "none"
18068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 \begin_inset space ~
18078 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18082 – sont très utiles.
18085 \begin_layout Itemize
18090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18099 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18103 \begin_layout Standard
18104 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18105 \begin_inset space ~
18108 – in contrast to an overfull line
18109 \begin_inset space ~
18112 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18116 \begin_layout Standard
18117 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18121 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18122 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18123 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18128 \begin_layout Enumerate
18129 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18130 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18131 or \SpecialChar TeX
18137 \begin_layout Itemize
18139 \begin_inset space ~
18142 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18143 \begin_inset space ~
18146 – sont très utiles.
18150 \begin_layout Enumerate
18151 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18152 \begin_inset Newline newline
18157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18158 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18159 Optional line break
18165 \begin_layout Itemize
18166 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18167 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18168 should be followed by
18169 a line break opportunity.
18172 \begin_layout Standard
18173 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18174 \begin_inset space ~
18178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18180 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18191 \begin_layout Enumerate
18192 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18193 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18194 or en dashes (see section
18195 \begin_inset space ~
18199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18201 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18212 Changes and backwards compatibility
18215 \begin_layout Standard
18216 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18221 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18222 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18231 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18232 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18240 \begin_layout Standard
18241 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18243 \begin_inset space ~
18246 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18248 prevents ligation to dashes.
18250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18257 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18262 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18263 after the input (unless the current text font is
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 The behavior was changed since
18273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18288 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18289 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18290 as non-breakable dashes.
18291 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18300 \begin_layout Standard
18303 \begin_inset space ~
18311 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18316 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18319 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18320 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18321 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18322 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18324 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18328 If you used both literal and
18329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18336 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18342 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18345 \begin_layout Subsection
18347 \begin_inset Index idx
18350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18359 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18366 \begin_layout Standard
18367 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18368 but automatically in the output.
18369 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18375 \begin_inset Index idx
18378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18385 following the rules of the document language.
18387 does not hyphenate text in the
18391 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18394 \begin_layout Standard
18396 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18400 font and with unusual constructs, like
18401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18409 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18410 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18411 This is done with the menu
18413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18414 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18416 \begin_inset space ~
18422 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18424 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18428 \begin_layout Standard
18429 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18430 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18441 would then see the hyphen
18442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18449 as a line break possibility.
18450 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18451 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18455 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18458 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18460 Prevent Hyphenation
18465 \begin_inset space ~
18473 \begin_layout Subsection
18475 \begin_inset Index idx
18478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18488 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18491 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18498 \begin_layout Standard
18499 When \SpecialChar LyX
18500 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18501 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18503 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18509 appropriate amount of space.
18510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18513 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18515 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18516 gets after another word.
18519 \begin_layout Standard
18520 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18521 not work in all cases.
18523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18534 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18535 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18538 \begin_layout Standard
18539 Here are some examples of
18543 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18546 \begin_layout Itemize
18551 \begin_layout Itemize
18556 \begin_layout Standard
18557 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18560 \begin_layout Itemize
18562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18566 this is too much space!
18569 \begin_layout Itemize
18574 \begin_layout Standard
18575 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18578 \begin_layout Standard
18579 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18582 \begin_layout Enumerate
18586 \begin_inset space ~
18591 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18592 \begin_inset space ~
18596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18598 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18603 \begin_inset Index idx
18606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18607 Spaces ! inter-word
18615 \begin_layout Enumerate
18619 \begin_inset space ~
18624 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18631 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18636 \begin_inset Index idx
18639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18648 \begin_layout Enumerate
18652 \begin_inset space ~
18656 \begin_inset space ~
18660 \begin_inset space ~
18667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18669 \begin_inset space ~
18674 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18675 This function is also bound to
18678 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18684 \begin_layout Standard
18685 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18688 \begin_layout Itemize
18690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18694 \begin_inset space \space{}
18697 this is too much space!
18700 \begin_layout Itemize
18701 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18705 \begin_layout Standard
18706 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18707 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18709 will take care of this.
18712 \begin_layout Standard
18713 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18717 \begin_inset space ~
18723 feature described in the section
18725 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18730 Additional Features
18735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18737 \begin_inset Index idx
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18741 Typography ! Quotation marks
18747 \begin_inset Index idx
18750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 Quotation marks | see
18755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 \begin_layout Standard
18783 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18784 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18785 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18795 The keyboard character,
18799 , generates this automatically.
18802 \begin_layout Standard
18803 You can specify what character the
18807 key produces by using the submenu
18813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18817 \begin_inset Index idx
18820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 Document ! Settings
18826 dialog and switching the
18830 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18831 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18833 \begin_inset space ~
18839 \begin_layout Labeling
18840 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18852 \begin_inset space ~
18856 \begin_inset space ~
18860 \begin_inset Quotes els
18864 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18878 \begin_inset Quotes els
18882 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18885 quotation marks (as common, e.
18886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18892 \begin_layout Labeling
18893 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18896 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18900 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18904 \begin_inset space ~
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18916 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18922 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18926 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18930 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18934 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18937 quotation marks (as common, e.
18938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18944 \begin_layout Labeling
18945 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18948 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18952 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18956 \begin_inset space ~
18960 \begin_inset space ~
18964 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18968 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18974 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18978 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18982 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18986 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18989 quotation marks (as common, e.
18990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18996 \begin_layout Labeling
18997 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19000 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19004 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19008 \begin_inset space ~
19012 \begin_inset space ~
19016 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19020 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19026 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19030 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19034 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19038 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19041 quotation marks (as common, e.
19042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19048 \begin_layout Labeling
19049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19052 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19056 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19068 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19072 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19078 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19082 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19086 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19090 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19093 quotation marks (as common, e.
19094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19097 g., in Switzerland)
19100 \begin_layout Labeling
19101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19104 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19108 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19120 \begin_inset Quotes als
19124 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19130 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19134 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19138 \begin_inset Quotes als
19142 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19145 quotation marks (as common, e.
19146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19152 \begin_layout Labeling
19153 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19156 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19160 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19176 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19182 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19186 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19190 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19194 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19197 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19200 \begin_layout Labeling
19201 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19204 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19208 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19212 \begin_inset space ~
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19220 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19224 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19230 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19234 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19238 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19242 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19245 quotation marks (as common, e.
19246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19249 g., in Great Britain)
19252 \begin_layout Labeling
19253 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19256 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19260 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19264 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19272 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19276 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19282 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19286 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19290 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19294 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19297 quotation marks (as common, e.
19298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19304 \begin_layout Labeling
19305 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19308 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19312 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19324 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19328 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19334 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19338 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19342 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19346 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19349 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19354 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19355 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19356 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19357 the inner marks differ).
19365 \begin_layout Labeling
19366 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19369 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19373 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19377 \begin_inset space ~
19381 \begin_inset space ~
19385 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19389 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19395 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19399 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19403 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19407 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19410 quotation marks (as common, e.
19411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19417 \begin_layout Labeling
19418 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19421 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19425 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19429 \begin_inset space ~
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19437 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19441 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19447 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19451 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19455 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19459 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19462 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19465 \begin_layout Labeling
19466 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19467 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19475 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19481 \begin_inset space ~
19485 \begin_inset space ~
19491 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19499 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19503 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19507 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19511 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19515 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19518 quotation marks (as common, e.
19519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19527 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19528 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19536 \begin_layout Labeling
19537 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19538 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19546 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19552 \begin_inset space ~
19556 \begin_inset space ~
19562 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19570 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19574 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19578 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19582 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19586 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19589 quotation marks (as common, e.
19590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19593 g., in North Korea and China)
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19599 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19607 \begin_layout Standard
19608 Inner quotation marks
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19614 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19615 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19623 does not necessarily mean
19624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19632 This is why we call them
19633 \begin_inset Quotes els
19637 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19653 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19655 \begin_inset Quotes els
19659 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19662 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19665 arg "quote-insert inner"
19670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19676 \begin_layout Standard
19677 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19678 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19679 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19680 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19681 If you check the setting
19683 Use dynamic quotation marks
19687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19688 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19691 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19692 they appear in a special color).
19693 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19694 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19699 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19702 \begin_layout Standard
19703 Individual quotation marks (i.
19704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19707 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19708 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19712 \begin_layout Subsection
19714 \begin_inset Index idx
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 Typography ! Ligatures
19724 \begin_inset Index idx
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19758 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19765 \begin_layout Standard
19766 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19767 print them as single characters.
19768 These groups are known as
19773 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19774 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19776 Here are the standard ligatures:
19779 \begin_layout Itemize
19783 \begin_layout Itemize
19787 \begin_layout Itemize
19791 \begin_layout Itemize
19795 \begin_layout Itemize
19799 \begin_layout Standard
19800 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19803 \begin_layout Standard
19804 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19805 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19813 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19829 To break a ligature, use
19831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19832 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19834 \begin_inset space ~
19841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19852 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19869 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19877 \begin_layout Subsection
19879 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19881 \begin_inset Index idx
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 \begin_layout Standard
19897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19898 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19902 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19905 \begin_layout Description
19907 The name of the game.
19910 \begin_layout Description
19912 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19916 \begin_layout Description
19918 The \SpecialChar TeX
19919 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19923 \begin_layout Description
19924 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19925 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19929 \begin_layout Standard
19930 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19936 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19944 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19945 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19946 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19947 converges to the number
19948 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19951 : The actual version is
19952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19960 , the previous one was
19961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19972 \begin_layout Subsection
19974 \begin_inset Index idx
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 \begin_layout Standard
19987 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19988 space between two words.
19989 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19999 for units use the menu
20001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20002 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20004 \begin_inset space ~
20012 arg "space-insert thin"
20018 \begin_layout Standard
20019 Here is an example to show the differences:
20022 \begin_layout Standard
20023 \begin_inset Tabular
20024 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20025 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20026 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20027 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 \begin_inset space ~
20038 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 space between number and unit
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20066 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 half space between number and unit
20091 \begin_layout Subsection
20093 \begin_inset Index idx
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20105 \begin_layout Standard
20106 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20108 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20109 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20110 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20111 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20112 These bits of text became known as
20123 \begin_layout Standard
20124 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20125 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20126 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20127 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20128 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20129 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20130 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20131 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20132 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20133 \begin_inset Newline newline
20141 \begin_inset Newline newline
20149 \begin_inset Newline newline
20152 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20153 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20154 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20156 \begin_inset space ~
20160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20162 key "latexcompanion"
20168 \begin_inset space ~
20172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20179 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20180 's page break mechanism.
20183 \begin_layout Chapter
20184 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20187 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20194 \begin_layout Standard
20195 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20198 \begin_inset space ~
20204 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20207 \begin_layout Section
20209 \begin_inset Index idx
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20228 \begin_layout Standard
20230 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20233 \begin_layout Description
20236 \begin_inset space ~
20239 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20240 \begin_inset Newline newline
20244 \begin_inset Note Note
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20256 \begin_layout Description
20257 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20258 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20259 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20262 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20263 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20265 \begin_inset space ~
20271 \begin_inset Newline newline
20275 \begin_inset Note Comment
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20288 \begin_layout Description
20290 \begin_inset space ~
20293 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20294 set in the document settings under
20296 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20298 \begin_inset space ~
20304 \begin_inset Newline newline
20308 \begin_inset Newline newline
20312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20322 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20327 of a comment that appears in the output.
20333 \begin_inset Newline newline
20337 \begin_inset Newline newline
20340 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20343 \begin_layout Standard
20344 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20356 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20359 \begin_layout Section
20361 \begin_inset Index idx
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20373 name "sec:Footnotes"
20380 \begin_layout Standard
20382 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20388 or the toolbar button
20391 arg "footnote-insert"
20403 \begin_inset Graphics
20404 filename clipart/footnote.png
20413 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20414 's representation of your footnote.
20424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20443 label, the box will
20447 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20448 Clicking on the box label again will close
20461 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20462 and click on the footnote
20477 \begin_layout Standard
20478 Here is an example footnote:
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20495 \begin_layout Standard
20496 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20497 position where the footnote box is placed.
20498 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20499 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20500 according to the document class.
20502 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20503 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20509 ey are described in the
20512 \begin_inset space ~
20520 \begin_layout Section
20522 \begin_inset Index idx
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20534 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20541 \begin_layout Standard
20542 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20544 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20548 \begin_inset space ~
20553 or the toolbar button
20556 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20582 appearing within your text.
20583 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20584 's representation of your margin
20593 \begin_layout Standard
20594 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20598 \begin_inset Marginal
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 This is a marginal note.
20611 \begin_layout Standard
20612 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20613 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20614 pages, right on odd pages.
20617 \begin_layout Standard
20618 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20621 \begin_inset space ~
20629 \begin_inset space ~
20637 \begin_layout Section
20638 Graphics and Images
20639 \begin_inset Index idx
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 \begin_inset Index idx
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20661 name "sec:Graphics"
20668 \begin_layout Standard
20669 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20670 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20673 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20682 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20685 \begin_layout Standard
20686 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20691 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20692 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20694 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20695 \begin_inset space ~
20699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20701 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20708 \begin_layout Standard
20713 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20714 of the image in the output.
20715 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20719 \begin_inset space ~
20723 \begin_inset space ~
20732 \begin_inset space ~
20736 \begin_inset space ~
20740 \begin_inset space ~
20745 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20746 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20754 \begin_layout Standard
20758 \begin_inset space ~
20762 \begin_inset space ~
20767 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20768 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20770 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20775 \begin_inset space ~
20780 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20781 with the image size is printed.
20784 \begin_layout Standard
20785 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20786 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20788 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20791 \begin_layout Standard
20793 \begin_inset Graphics
20794 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20802 \begin_layout Standard
20803 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20804 the image into a float, see section
20805 \begin_inset space ~
20809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20811 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20818 \begin_layout Subsection
20820 \begin_inset Index idx
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20832 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20839 \begin_layout Standard
20840 You can insert images in any known file format.
20841 But as we explained in section
20842 \begin_inset space ~
20846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20848 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20852 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20854 therefore uses the program
20858 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20859 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20860 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20861 \begin_inset space ~
20865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20867 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20874 \begin_layout Standard
20875 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20878 \begin_layout Description
20880 \begin_inset space ~
20883 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20884 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20885 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20889 Graphics Interchange Format
20890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20893 (GIF, file extension
20894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20906 \begin_inset Index idx
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20941 Portable Network Graphics
20942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20945 (PNG, file extension
20946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20958 \begin_inset Index idx
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20993 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20997 (JPG, file extension
20998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21022 \begin_inset Index idx
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 \begin_layout Description
21058 \begin_inset space ~
21061 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21063 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21064 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21065 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21066 \begin_inset Newline newline
21069 Scalable image formats can be
21070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21073 Scalable Vector Graphics
21074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21077 (SVG, file extension
21078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21090 \begin_inset Index idx
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21125 Encapsulated PostScript
21126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21129 (EPS, file extension
21130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21142 \begin_inset Index idx
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21177 Portable Document Format
21178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21181 (PDF, file extension
21182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21194 \begin_inset Index idx
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21212 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21213 result will not be scalable.
21214 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21228 \begin_layout Standard
21229 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21236 \begin_layout Subsection
21237 Grouping of Image Settings
21238 \begin_inset Index idx
21241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 Images ! Settings grouping
21250 \begin_layout Standard
21251 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21253 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21254 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21256 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21257 need to manually change each of them.
21261 \begin_layout Standard
21262 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21265 \begin_inset space ~
21269 \begin_inset space ~
21281 \begin_inset space ~
21285 \begin_inset space ~
21291 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21292 and checking the name of the desired group.
21295 \begin_layout Section
21297 \begin_inset Index idx
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21316 \begin_layout Standard
21317 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21320 arg "tabular-insert"
21325 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21329 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21330 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21331 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21334 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21335 from the rest of the table.
21336 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21337 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21339 Here is an example table:
21342 \begin_layout Standard
21344 \begin_inset Tabular
21345 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21346 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21552 \begin_layout Standard
21554 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21555 This corresponds to the
21556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21563 table style listed in the style selection.
21566 \begin_layout Standard
21568 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21569 Other available styles include:
21572 \begin_layout Itemize
21574 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21583 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21587 \begin_layout Itemize
21589 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21590 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21593 \begin_layout Itemize
21595 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21604 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21605 bold top/bottom lines (see
21616 \begin_layout Standard
21618 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21619 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21620 button can be changed in
21622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21623 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21627 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21631 \begin_layout Subsection
21635 \begin_layout Standard
21636 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21639 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21643 This brings up the table dialog.
21644 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21645 cursor is placed currently.
21646 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21647 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21648 done on all of your selection.
21651 \begin_layout Standard
21652 In addition to the table dialog, the
21655 \begin_inset space ~
21660 helps you in setting table properties.
21661 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21664 \begin_layout Standard
21668 \begin_inset space ~
21673 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21674 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21675 current cell respectively.
21676 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21678 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21679 of text, see section
21680 \begin_inset space ~
21684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21686 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21693 \begin_layout Standard
21694 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21695 using the check box
21704 This will merge the cells to
21708 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21709 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21710 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21711 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21712 in the last row without the upper border:
21715 \begin_layout Standard
21717 \begin_inset Tabular
21718 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21719 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21720 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21721 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21722 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21734 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21743 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 \begin_layout Standard
21855 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21856 -arguments for the table.
21857 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21858 explained in the chapter
21865 \begin_inset space ~
21871 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21872 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21873 but are visible in the output.
21876 \begin_layout Standard
21877 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 Most DVI-viewers are
21889 able to display rotations.
21897 \begin_layout Standard
21902 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21907 adds lines for all cell borders.
21910 \begin_layout Subsection
21912 \begin_inset Index idx
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 Tables ! Multi-page
21922 \begin_inset Index idx
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 \begin_layout Standard
21935 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21938 \begin_inset space ~
21942 \begin_inset space ~
21950 \begin_inset space ~
21955 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21956 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21959 \begin_layout Description
21964 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21965 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21966 Except for the first page, if
21969 \begin_inset space ~
21977 \begin_layout Description
21981 \begin_inset space ~
21986 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21987 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21990 \begin_layout Description
21995 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21996 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21997 except for the last page, if
22000 \begin_inset space ~
22008 \begin_layout Description
22012 \begin_inset space ~
22017 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22018 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22021 \begin_layout Description
22022 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22023 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22029 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22032 \begin_inset space ~
22040 \begin_layout Standard
22041 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22042 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22043 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22049 In this context, first means first in this order:
22052 \begin_inset space ~
22064 \begin_inset space ~
22069 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22072 \begin_layout Standard
22074 \begin_inset Tabular
22075 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22076 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22077 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22078 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22079 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22080 <row endfirsthead="true">
22081 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22092 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 <row endfirsthead="true">
22112 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 <row endhead="true">
22145 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <row endhead="true">
22176 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 <row endfoot="true">
22209 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 <row endlastfoot="true">
24191 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24228 \begin_layout Subsection
24230 \begin_inset Index idx
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24242 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24249 \begin_layout Standard
24250 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24251 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24252 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24253 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24257 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24260 \begin_layout Standard
24261 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24262 for the column in the table dialog.
24263 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24264 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24268 \begin_layout Standard
24270 \begin_inset Tabular
24271 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24272 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24273 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24274 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24275 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24364 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 This is longer now.
24425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24476 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24477 This is longer now.
24482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24508 \begin_layout Standard
24509 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24510 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24516 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24522 Selection with the mouse or with
24526 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24527 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24528 the selection from outside the table.
24531 \begin_layout Section
24533 \begin_inset Index idx
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24552 \begin_layout Subsection
24556 \begin_layout Standard
24557 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24558 have a fixed location.
24560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24567 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24575 \begin_inset space ~
24580 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24581 too many notes on the current page.
24584 \begin_layout Standard
24585 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24586 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24587 and pages without text.
24588 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24589 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24590 Floats are therefore numbered.
24591 Referencing is described in section
24592 \begin_inset space ~
24596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24598 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24605 \begin_layout Standard
24606 To insert a float, use the menu
24608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24612 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24613 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24615 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24616 \begin_inset Index idx
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24626 paragraph within the float.
24627 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24628 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24629 left-clicking on the box label.
24630 A closed float box looks like this:
24631 \begin_inset Graphics
24632 filename clipart/float.png
24637 – a gray button with a red label.
24640 \begin_layout Standard
24641 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24643 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24646 \begin_layout Subsection
24648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24650 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24655 \begin_inset Index idx
24658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 Floats ! Figure floats
24667 \begin_layout Standard
24669 \begin_inset space ~
24673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24675 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24679 was created using the menu
24681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24682 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24688 arg "float-insert figure"
24692 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24701 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24705 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24706 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24710 \begin_inset space ~
24718 arg "layout-paragraph"
24724 \begin_layout Standard
24725 \begin_inset Float figure
24732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 \begin_inset Graphics
24735 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24745 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24750 name "fig:A-star-in"
24767 \begin_layout Standard
24768 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24769 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24780 ) and refer to it using the menu
24782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24788 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24792 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24793 vague references like
24794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24801 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24802 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24812 For more about cross-references, see section
24813 \begin_inset space ~
24817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24819 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24826 \begin_layout Standard
24827 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24828 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24829 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24830 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24831 as described in section
24832 \begin_inset space ~
24836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24838 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24844 \begin_inset space ~
24848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24850 reference "fig:Two-images"
24854 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24855 You can also set the images one below the other.
24857 \begin_inset space ~
24861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24863 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24870 reference "fig:Star"
24874 are the subfigures.
24877 \begin_layout Standard
24878 \begin_inset Float figure
24885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24886 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24890 \begin_inset Float figure
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24903 name "fig:Undefinable"
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 \begin_inset Graphics
24917 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24929 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24933 \begin_inset Float figure
24940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Graphics
24960 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24972 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24984 name "fig:Two-images"
25001 \begin_layout Subsection
25003 \begin_inset Index idx
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25007 Floats ! Table floats
25015 \begin_layout Standard
25016 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25019 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25022 or the toolbar button
25025 arg "float-insert table"
25029 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25030 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25031 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25033 \begin_inset space ~
25037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25039 reference "tab:Table-float"
25046 \begin_layout Standard
25047 \begin_inset Float table
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25060 name "tab:Table-float"
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 \begin_inset Tabular
25075 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25076 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25079 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25227 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25230 \end{array}\right]$
25238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25272 \begin_layout Subsection
25274 \begin_inset Index idx
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_layout Standard
25288 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25289 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25290 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25292 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25300 \begin_inset space ~
25308 \begin_layout Section
25310 \begin_inset Index idx
25313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_layout Standard
25324 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25326 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25327 \begin_inset space \space{}
25334 \begin_layout Standard
25335 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25336 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25342 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25343 and its alignment within the page.
25346 \begin_layout Standard
25348 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25358 height_special "totalheight"
25363 backgroundcolor "none"
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 This is a minipage.
25370 The text is set in an italic style.
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25377 another formatting.
25385 \begin_layout Standard
25386 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25389 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25393 as described in section
25394 \begin_inset space ~
25398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25400 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25405 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25411 \begin_layout Standard
25412 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25422 height_special "totalheight"
25427 backgroundcolor "none"
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25431 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25432 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25442 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25452 height_special "totalheight"
25457 backgroundcolor "none"
25460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25461 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25462 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25470 \begin_layout Standard
25471 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25477 \begin_layout Standard
25478 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25480 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25487 \begin_inset space ~
25495 \begin_layout Chapter
25496 Mathematical Formulas
25497 \begin_inset Index idx
25500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25507 \begin_inset Index idx
25510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25541 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25548 \begin_layout Standard
25549 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25554 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25557 \begin_layout Section
25559 \begin_inset Index idx
25562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25571 \begin_layout Standard
25572 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25585 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25587 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25588 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25589 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25597 \begin_layout Standard
25598 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25602 \begin_inset space ~
25607 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25610 \begin_layout Standard
25611 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25612 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25615 \begin_layout Standard
25616 This is a line with an inline formula
25617 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25624 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25625 paragraph, like this one:
25626 \begin_inset Formula
25633 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25636 \begin_layout Standard
25638 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25640 For example, typing
25641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25654 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25655 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25659 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25662 \begin_inset space ~
25670 \begin_layout Subsection
25671 Navigating in Formulas
25672 \begin_inset Index idx
25675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25684 \begin_layout Standard
25685 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25686 achieved with the arrow keys.
25688 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25689 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25694 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25695 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25699 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25703 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25706 \end{array}\right]$
25714 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25719 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25720 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25723 \begin_layout Standard
25728 , printed in this document as
25729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25733 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25740 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25741 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25742 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25747 For example, if you want
25748 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25756 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25766 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25770 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25775 , since in the latter case only the
25778 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25783 will be under the square root sign:
25784 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25790 \begin_layout Standard
25791 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25793 \begin_inset Formula
25795 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25804 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25805 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25808 \begin_layout Subsection
25812 \begin_layout Standard
25813 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25814 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25818 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25819 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25820 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25821 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25822 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25826 \begin_layout Subsection
25827 Exponents and Subscripts
25828 \begin_inset Index idx
25831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 \begin_inset Index idx
25841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 \begin_layout Standard
25851 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25854 arg "math-superscript"
25860 arg "math-subscript"
25863 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25865 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25868 , type in a formula
25871 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25881 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25887 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25891 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25897 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25903 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25912 , you have to use an extra
25916 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25917 For example, if you want
25918 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25924 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25930 Subscripts are similar: To get
25931 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25937 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25945 \begin_layout Subsection
25947 \begin_inset Index idx
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25959 \begin_layout Standard
25960 Create a fraction either with the command
25966 or by using the icon
25969 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25975 \begin_inset space ~
25981 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25982 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25983 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25988 To move back up, press
25993 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25994 \begin_inset Formula
25996 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25999 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26007 \begin_layout Subsection
26009 \begin_inset Index idx
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26021 \begin_layout Standard
26022 Roots can be created using the
26025 \begin_inset space ~
26033 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26039 arg "math-insert \\root"
26061 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26067 always produces a square root.
26070 \begin_layout Subsection
26071 Operators with Limits
26072 \begin_inset Index idx
26075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26082 \begin_inset Index idx
26085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26094 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26101 \begin_layout Standard
26103 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26107 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26110 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26111 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26112 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26113 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26114 The sum operator will automatically place its
26115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26122 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26124 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26128 \begin_inset Formula
26130 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26135 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26139 \begin_layout Standard
26140 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26142 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26143 behind the operator and using the menu
26145 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26146 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26148 \begin_inset space ~
26152 \begin_inset space ~
26166 \begin_layout Standard
26167 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26176 \begin_inset Index idx
26179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26186 \begin_inset Formula
26188 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26193 which will place the
26194 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26206 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26207 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26213 \begin_layout Standard
26214 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26221 Have a look at section
26222 \begin_inset space ~
26226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26228 reference "subsec:Functions"
26232 for an explanation of function macros.
26235 \begin_layout Subsection
26237 \begin_inset Index idx
26240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26249 \begin_layout Standard
26250 Most math symbols can be found in the
26253 \begin_inset space ~
26258 under one of several categories; including
26275 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26279 \begin_layout Standard
26280 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26281 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26282 don't have to use the
26285 \begin_inset space ~
26290 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26292 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26295 \begin_layout Subsection
26297 \begin_inset Index idx
26300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26309 \begin_layout Standard
26310 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26316 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26322 \begin_inset space ~
26330 arg "math-insert \\space"
26334 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26335 For example, the sequence
26340 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26343 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26345 \begin_inset Graphics
26346 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26351 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26352 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26353 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26354 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26355 , because they are negative
26357 Here are two examples:
26360 \begin_layout Standard
26370 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26376 \begin_layout Standard
26386 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26392 \begin_layout Subsection
26394 \begin_inset Index idx
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26406 name "subsec:Functions"
26413 \begin_layout Standard
26417 \begin_inset space ~
26422 contains under the button
26425 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26428 a number of function macros, such as
26429 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26433 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26441 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26448 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26449 avoid confusions, because
26450 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26454 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26460 \begin_layout Standard
26461 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26463 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26467 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26473 \begin_layout Standard
26474 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26475 are placed, as described in section
26476 \begin_inset space ~
26480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26482 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26489 \begin_layout Subsection
26491 \begin_inset Index idx
26494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 \begin_layout Standard
26504 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26506 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26507 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26508 commands, for example, to enter
26509 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26512 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26513 Our example is entered by typing
26518 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26525 \begin_inset space ~
26529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26531 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26535 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26538 \begin_layout Standard
26539 \begin_inset Float table
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26547 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26552 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26556 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26566 \begin_inset Tabular
26567 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26568 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26709 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26763 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26925 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26979 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27033 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27087 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27153 \begin_layout Standard
27154 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27157 \begin_inset space ~
27165 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27168 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27172 \begin_layout Section
27173 Brackets and Delimiters
27174 \begin_inset Index idx
27177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27184 \begin_inset Index idx
27187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27196 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27203 \begin_layout Standard
27204 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27206 For some purposes, using just the keys
27211 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27212 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27213 toolbar delimiter icon
27216 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27220 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27221 \begin_inset Formula
27223 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27231 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27232 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27236 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27239 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27245 \begin_inset Formula
27247 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27255 \begin_layout Standard
27256 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27257 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27262 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27263 left side and right side.
27264 If you use the option
27267 \begin_inset space ~
27272 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27273 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27275 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27280 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27281 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27284 \begin_layout Standard
27285 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27286 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27287 is to go inside the brackets.
27288 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27293 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27294 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27295 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27299 arg "math-delim ( )"
27305 \begin_layout Section
27306 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27307 \begin_inset Index idx
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 \begin_inset Index idx
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27327 \begin_inset Index idx
27330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27331 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27344 \begin_inset space ~
27352 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27356 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27357 Here is an example:
27358 \begin_inset Formula
27360 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27369 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27370 \begin_inset space ~
27374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27376 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27381 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27382 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27383 This alignment is set in the box
27388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27437 for every column as default.
27438 For example, the sequence
27439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27450 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27451 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27452 corresponds to the relevant column.
27453 The result will look like this:
27454 \begin_inset Formula
27457 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27458 column & has & has\,right\\
27459 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27468 \begin_layout Standard
27469 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27472 arg "newline-insert newline"
27475 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27476 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27481 or the math toolbar.
27484 \begin_layout Standard
27485 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27486 It can be created with the menu
27488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27489 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 \begin_inset space ~
27503 Here is an example:
27504 \begin_inset Formula
27518 \begin_layout Standard
27519 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27522 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27525 arg "newline-insert newline"
27529 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27534 arg "newline-insert newline"
27537 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27545 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27546 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27547 A new row is created by every further entry of
27550 arg "newline-insert newline"
27554 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27555 Here is an example:
27556 \begin_inset Formula
27558 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27559 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27564 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27565 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27566 \begin_inset Formula
27568 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27576 \begin_layout Standard
27577 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27584 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27585 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27588 reference "eq:asquared"
27593 The other types are described in section
27594 \begin_inset space ~
27598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27600 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27607 \begin_layout Section
27608 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27609 \begin_inset Index idx
27612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27613 Math ! Formula numbering
27619 \begin_inset Index idx
27622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27623 Math ! Referencing formulas
27629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27631 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27639 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27642 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27644 \begin_inset space ~
27648 \begin_inset space ~
27656 arg "math-number-toggle"
27660 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27661 within parentheses.
27662 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27663 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27664 the document class.
27665 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27666 separated by a dot:
27667 \begin_inset Formula
27677 arg "math-number-toggle"
27680 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27681 You can only number displayed formulas.
27684 \begin_layout Standard
27685 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27688 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27690 \begin_inset space ~
27694 \begin_inset space ~
27702 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27705 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27706 \begin_inset Formula
27709 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27715 To number all lines use the shortcut
27718 arg "math-number-toggle"
27724 \begin_layout Standard
27725 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27728 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27729 A label is inserted with the menu
27731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27740 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27741 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27742 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27754 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27755 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27756 We inserted in the following example the label
27757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27764 in the second line:
27765 \begin_inset Formula
27767 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27768 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27773 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27774 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27775 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27779 \begin_inset space ~
27787 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27791 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27792 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27793 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27794 as the formula number:
27797 \begin_layout Standard
27798 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27801 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27808 \begin_layout Standard
27809 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27810 's cross-reference box are described in section
27811 \begin_inset space ~
27815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27817 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27822 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27830 \begin_layout Section
27831 User defined math macros
27832 \begin_inset Index idx
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27844 \begin_layout Standard
27846 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27847 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27848 Math macros are explained in section
27851 \begin_inset space ~
27863 \begin_layout Section
27867 \begin_layout Subsection
27869 \begin_inset Index idx
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27882 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27883 To set a font in a formula, use the
27886 \begin_inset space ~
27894 arg "math-insert \\font"
27897 , or enter its command, listed in table
27898 \begin_inset space ~
27902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27904 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27911 \begin_layout Standard
27912 \begin_inset Float table
27919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27925 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27929 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27939 \begin_inset Tabular
27940 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27941 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28002 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28029 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28062 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28089 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28116 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28150 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28177 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28211 \begin_layout Standard
28212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28220 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28236 \begin_layout Standard
28237 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28238 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28243 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28244 space when you need a space in the box.
28245 Here is an example where
28246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28257 denotes the set of numbers:
28258 \begin_inset Formula
28260 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28268 \begin_layout Standard
28269 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28270 You can, for example, put a character in
28279 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28283 \begin_inset Newline newline
28286 So it is better not to use this feature.
28289 \begin_layout Standard
28290 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28291 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28295 \begin_inset Newline newline
28298 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28304 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28305 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28318 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28321 \begin_layout Standard
28322 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28325 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28327 \begin_inset space ~
28335 \begin_layout Subsection
28337 \begin_inset Index idx
28340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28349 \begin_layout Standard
28350 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28352 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28356 \begin_inset space ~
28360 \begin_inset space ~
28368 \begin_inset space ~
28376 arg "math-insert \\font"
28380 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28381 in black instead of blue.
28382 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28383 Here is an example:
28384 \begin_inset Formula
28387 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28388 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28397 \begin_layout Subsection
28399 \begin_inset Index idx
28402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28411 \begin_layout Standard
28412 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28413 automatically chosen in most situations.
28431 For most characters,
28439 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28440 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28445 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28446 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28447 thinks are appropriate.
28448 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28451 arg "math-insert \\style"
28455 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28456 For example, you can set
28457 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28460 , which is normally in
28469 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28473 The four styles are used in the following example:
28476 \begin_layout Standard
28477 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28481 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28485 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28489 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28495 \begin_layout Standard
28496 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28497 is set in a particular size with the menu
28499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28501 \begin_inset space ~
28506 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28507 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28508 will be adjusted to correspond.
28509 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28520 \begin_layout Standard
28524 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28530 \begin_layout Section
28531 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28533 \begin_inset Index idx
28536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28543 \begin_inset Index idx
28546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28555 \begin_layout Standard
28557 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28558 that are in common use.
28561 \begin_layout Subsection
28562 Enabling AMS-Support
28565 \begin_layout Standard
28566 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28567 the document by selecting the checkbox
28570 \begin_inset space ~
28574 \begin_inset space ~
28578 \begin_inset space ~
28585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28589 \begin_inset Index idx
28592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28593 Document ! Settings
28601 \begin_inset space ~
28607 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28608 -errors in formulas,
28609 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28612 \begin_layout Subsection
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28616 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28621 \begin_inset Index idx
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28625 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28633 \begin_layout Standard
28634 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28635 provides a selection of different formula types.
28637 allows you to choose between
28658 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28659 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28666 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28669 \begin_layout Chapter
28673 \begin_layout Section
28675 \begin_inset Index idx
28678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28687 name "sec:Cross-References"
28694 \begin_layout Standard
28695 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28696 's strengths is cross-references.
28697 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28699 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28700 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28701 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28704 \begin_layout Enumerate
28708 \begin_layout Enumerate
28709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28711 name "enu:Second-item"
28718 \begin_layout Enumerate
28722 \begin_layout Standard
28723 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28725 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28728 or by pressing the toolbar button
28735 A gray label box like this:
28736 \begin_inset Graphics
28737 filename clipart/label.png
28741 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28743 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28778 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28779 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28795 \begin_layout Standard
28796 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28801 or the toolbar button
28804 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28808 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28809 \begin_inset Graphics
28810 filename clipart/reference.png
28814 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28816 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28829 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28833 \begin_layout Standard
28834 As an alternative to
28836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28839 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28844 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28845 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28847 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28859 \begin_layout Standard
28860 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28861 \begin_inset space ~
28865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28867 reference "enu:Second-item"
28874 \begin_layout Standard
28875 It is recommended to use a protected space
28879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 described in section
28881 \begin_inset space ~
28885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28887 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28896 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28897 line breaks between them.
28900 \begin_layout Standard
28901 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28904 \begin_layout Description
28905 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28908 reference "fig:Two-images"
28915 \begin_layout Description
28916 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28917 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28929 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28936 \begin_layout Description
28937 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28938 \begin_inset space ~
28942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28943 LatexCommand pageref
28944 reference "fig:Two-images"
28951 \begin_layout Description
28953 \begin_inset space ~
28957 \begin_inset space ~
28960 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28962 LatexCommand vpageref
28963 reference "fig:Two-images"
28968 \begin_inset Newline newline
28971 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28972 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28973 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28974 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28975 it prints “on the next page”.
28976 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28979 \begin_layout Description
28981 \begin_inset space ~
28985 \begin_inset space ~
28989 \begin_inset space ~
28992 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28995 reference "fig:Two-images"
29000 \begin_inset Newline newline
29003 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29009 ; otherwise it behaves like
29013 \begin_inset space ~
29017 \begin_inset space ~
29026 \begin_layout Description
29028 \begin_inset space ~
29031 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29032 \begin_inset Newline newline
29036 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29044 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29054 \begin_inset Index idx
29057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29059 packages ! prettyref
29065 \begin_inset Index idx
29068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29070 packages ! refstyle
29081 \begin_inset Newline newline
29084 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29085 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29088 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29093 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29101 is the default and preferred because
29105 supports only English documents.
29106 The format is specified by using the command
29118 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29119 preamble of the document.
29120 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29138 \begin_inset Newline newline
29145 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29150 \begin_inset Newline newline
29161 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29162 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29164 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29165 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29170 , you might do so as follows:
29171 \begin_inset Newline newline
29178 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29183 \begin_inset Newline newline
29186 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29187 the package documentation
29188 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29190 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29196 \begin_inset Newline newline
29207 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29214 \begin_layout Description
29216 \begin_inset space ~
29219 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29221 LatexCommand nameref
29222 reference "fig:Two-images"
29229 \begin_layout Description
29231 \begin_inset space ~
29234 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29235 label for the reference:
29236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29237 LatexCommand labelonly
29238 reference "fig:Two-images"
29243 \begin_inset Newline newline
29246 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29247 Code, if you want to issue a command
29248 that \SpecialChar LyX
29254 , then you may want to use the
29257 \begin_inset space ~
29262 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29272 This is the form needed for e.
29273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29277 \begin_inset space \space{}
29284 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29285 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29287 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29291 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29295 \begin_layout Standard
29296 You can only use the style
29300 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29304 is always possible.
29307 \begin_layout Standard
29308 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29309 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29311 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29312 \begin_inset space ~
29316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29318 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29325 \begin_layout Standard
29326 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29330 \begin_inset space ~
29334 \begin_inset space ~
29339 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29340 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29343 \begin_inset space ~
29348 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29349 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29352 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29358 \begin_layout Standard
29359 You can change labels at any time.
29360 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29361 do not need to think about this.
29364 \begin_layout Standard
29365 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29367 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29372 References are described in detail in the section
29373 \begin_inset space ~
29383 \begin_inset space ~
29391 \begin_layout Section
29392 Table of Contents and other Listings
29393 \begin_inset Index idx
29396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29403 \begin_inset Index idx
29406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29407 Navigating ! Outline
29413 \begin_inset Index idx
29416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29432 \begin_layout Subsection
29434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29436 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29443 \begin_layout Standard
29444 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29447 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29449 \begin_inset space ~
29453 \begin_inset space ~
29459 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29461 If you click on it, the
29465 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29466 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29467 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29469 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29471 \begin_inset space ~
29476 that is described in section
29477 \begin_inset space ~
29481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29483 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29490 \begin_layout Standard
29491 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29492 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29494 \begin_inset space ~
29498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29500 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29504 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29506 \begin_inset space ~
29510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29512 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29516 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29518 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29521 \begin_layout Subsection
29522 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29525 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29532 \begin_layout Standard
29533 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29535 You can insert them via the
29537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29538 List/Contents/References
29541 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29544 \begin_layout Section
29545 URLs and Hyperlinks
29546 \begin_inset Index idx
29549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29556 \begin_inset Index idx
29559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29568 \begin_layout Subsection
29570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29579 \begin_layout Standard
29580 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29582 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29588 \begin_layout Standard
29589 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29591 \begin_inset Flex URL
29594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29596 https://www.lyx.org
29604 \begin_layout Standard
29605 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29611 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29615 \begin_layout Standard
29616 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29624 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29633 \begin_layout Subsection
29635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29637 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29644 \begin_layout Standard
29645 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29650 or with the toolbar button
29657 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29666 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29667 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29668 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29670 name "LyX's homepage"
29671 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29676 , an Email address like this:
29677 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29679 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29680 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29686 , or a link to a file.
29691 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29700 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29713 to the link target.
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29717 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29718 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29719 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29720 the text style dialog.
29721 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29725 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29727 name "LyX's homepage"
29728 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29737 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29741 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29744 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29748 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29750 \begin_inset Newline newline
29758 \begin_inset Newline newline
29765 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29768 \begin_layout Section
29770 \begin_inset Index idx
29773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29782 name "sec:Appendices"
29789 \begin_layout Standard
29790 Appendices are created with the menu
29792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29794 \begin_inset space ~
29798 \begin_inset space ~
29804 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29805 as the appendix part of the book.
29806 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29809 \begin_layout Standard
29810 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29811 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29812 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29813 and the subsection number.
29814 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29818 \begin_layout Standard
29820 \begin_inset space ~
29824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29826 reference "chap:Credits"
29831 \begin_inset space ~
29835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29837 reference "subsec:Export"
29844 \begin_layout Section
29846 \begin_inset Index idx
29849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29858 name "sec:Bibliography"
29865 \begin_layout Standard
29866 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29868 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29869 \begin_inset space ~
29873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29875 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29882 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29887 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29888 \begin_inset space ~
29892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29894 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29899 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29900 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29901 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29905 using a bibliography database.
29908 \begin_layout Standard
29909 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29910 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29914 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29915 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29916 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29917 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29918 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29921 \begin_layout Subsection
29922 The Bibliography Environment
29923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29925 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29937 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29939 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29948 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29950 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29951 of ASCII characters only.
29955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29960 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29966 \begin_inset Newline newline
29970 \begin_inset Flex URL
29973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29975 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29985 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29995 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29996 \begin_inset Newline newline
30003 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30004 the number of the entry.
30009 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30018 \begin_layout Standard
30019 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30024 or the toolbar button
30027 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30031 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30032 containing the available citations.
30033 Select one or more keys from the list and
30043 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30044 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30048 \begin_layout Standard
30049 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30050 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30051 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30067 Companion Second Edition
30070 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30072 key "latexcompanion"
30080 \begin_layout Standard
30081 The \SpecialChar LyX
30082 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30083 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30094 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30101 \begin_inset Index idx
30104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30113 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30114 the label needs to be given the form
30115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30126 Author A and Author B(Year)
30127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30134 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30141 \begin_inset space ~
30146 in the document settings
30147 \begin_inset Index idx
30150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30151 Document ! Settings
30158 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30160 \begin_inset space ~
30166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30168 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30176 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30178 Once you have done that, the
30182 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30199 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30200 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30201 These two are madatory.
30202 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30205 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30207 ) and in abrreviated form (
30214 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30215 add the abbreviated form to
30219 and the full list to the optional
30227 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30228 If specified like this,
30230 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30231 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30241 is specified, toggling
30242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30249 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30250 full and abbreviated list
30254 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30255 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30256 the citation references.
30257 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30262 \begin_layout Standard
30263 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30266 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30276 arg "layout-paragraph"
30280 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30283 \begin_layout Subsection
30284 Bibliography databases
30285 \begin_inset Index idx
30288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 Bibliography ! Databases
30295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30297 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30311 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30313 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30314 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30319 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30321 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30322 your working field in a database.
30323 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30324 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30325 list for that document.
30326 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30330 \begin_layout Standard
30331 The database is a text file with the file extension
30332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30343 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30344 The format is explained in
30345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30352 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30356 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30362 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30363 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30364 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30366 \begin_inset Flex URL
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30371 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30379 \begin_layout Standard
30381 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30382 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30383 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30385 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30387 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30388 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30389 Those are addressed by
30394 \begin_inset Index idx
30397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30399 packages ! biblatex
30405 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30406 (although it has been significantly
30407 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30417 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30418 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30419 might conversely fail to correctly
30420 handle databases that use specific
30429 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30433 \begin_layout Standard
30434 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30439 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30445 \begin_inset Index idx
30448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30449 Document ! Settings
30461 \begin_inset space ~
30466 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30475 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30477 \begin_inset Index idx
30480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30481 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30490 \begin_layout Standard
30491 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30495 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30497 \begin_inset space ~
30503 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30504 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30512 Add bibliography to TOC
30514 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30519 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30520 in the document or just the cited references.
30522 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30527 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30528 differ from the encoding of the document.
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30534 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30535 style file is a text file with the file extension
30536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30547 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30548 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30549 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30550 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30552 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30558 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30559 \begin_inset Newline newline
30563 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30565 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30575 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30580 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30584 \begin_layout Standard
30585 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30588 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30590 \begin_inset Index idx
30593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30600 \begin_inset Index idx
30603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30605 packages ! biblatex
30613 \begin_layout Standard
30614 Accessing a database via
30618 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30622 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30624 \begin_inset space ~
30630 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30631 you cannot select a
30636 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30640 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30643 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30644 As for the styles, note the following.
30649 \begin_layout Standard
30654 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30667 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30668 file (text file with the file extension
30669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30680 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30681 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30683 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30687 \begin_layout Standard
30692 styles are not set in the
30695 \begin_inset space ~
30700 dialog, but in the document settings.
30701 \begin_inset Index idx
30704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30705 Document ! Settings
30710 However, in the dialog in the
30714 field, which is only visible if you use
30718 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30719 example how its heading will appear).
30720 These options are described in detail in the
30725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30735 \begin_layout Standard
30736 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30737 \begin_inset space ~
30741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30743 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30754 Bibliography Processors
30757 \begin_layout Standard
30758 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30759 uses a bibliography processor,
30760 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30761 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30762 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30764 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30765 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30768 \begin_layout Standard
30769 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30771 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30772 You can do this on a general level in
30774 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30775 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30776 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30779 or for individual documents in
30781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30786 The following variants are available by default:
30789 \begin_layout Description
30790 biber a specific, modern processor
30791 \begin_inset Index idx
30794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30801 developed exclusively for
30805 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30811 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30816 makes use of; if you use the
30820 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30827 \begin_layout Description
30828 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30829 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30830 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30834 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30837 \begin_layout Description
30838 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30839 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30843 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30847 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30851 features are supported.
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30855 By default (with the
30861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30862 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30875 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30876 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30877 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30880 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30881 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30894 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30895 -based bibliography styles).
30896 This should suit most needs.
30899 \begin_layout Standard
30900 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30901 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30902 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30907 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30908 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30909 You can adjust it in
30911 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30912 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30913 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30919 \begin_layout Standard
30920 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30921 can add below the selection.
30922 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30923 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30929 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30943 \begin_layout Standard
30945 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30947 These are explained in detail in section
30949 Customizing Bibliographies
30953 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30958 Additional Features
30963 \begin_layout Subsection
30965 \begin_inset Index idx
30968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30969 Bibliography ! Citation format
30975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30977 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30984 \begin_layout Standard
30985 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30990 \begin_inset space \space{}
30993 numerical citation (as
30994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31001 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31009 ) or author-year citations (as
31010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31019 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31024 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31032 \begin_inset Index idx
31035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31036 Document ! Settings
31041 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31047 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31048 labels, is there to use
31051 \begin_inset space ~
31062 \begin_inset space ~
31067 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31070 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31077 \begin_layout Standard
31078 With a bibliography database (see
31079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31081 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31088 ) one has in contrary to the
31092 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31093 These style formats are available:
31096 \begin_layout Description
31098 \begin_inset space ~
31101 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31102 -based approached without any additional packages
31103 (simple numeric citations).
31106 \begin_layout Description
31107 Biblatex loads the package
31112 \begin_inset Index idx
31115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31117 packages ! biblatex
31122 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31124 Biblatex citation style
31128 Biblatex bibliography style
31131 Options to the package
31135 can be entered in the
31142 \begin_layout Description
31144 \begin_inset space ~
31148 \begin_inset space ~
31151 mode) loads the package
31155 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31156 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31168 behavior very closely.
31173 this option has some additional styles.
31178 styles are also supported by this variant.
31181 \begin_layout Description
31183 \begin_inset space ~
31186 (BibTeX) loads the package
31191 \begin_inset Index idx
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31201 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31204 \begin_layout Description
31206 \begin_inset space ~
31209 (BibTeX) loads the package
31214 \begin_inset Index idx
31217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31224 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31227 \begin_layout Standard
31236 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31238 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31247 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31249 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31250 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31252 Biblatex citation style
31255 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31261 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31265 \begin_layout Standard
31266 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31267 are available in the
31272 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31273 a name prefix such as
31274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31289 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31294 \begin_inset space \space{}
31298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31309 \begin_layout Standard
31310 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31316 \begin_inset space \space{}
31319 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31325 \begin_inset space \space{}
31329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31341 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31345 \begin_inset space ~
31353 \begin_inset space ~
31359 Here is a simple example where the text
31360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31364 \begin_inset space ~
31368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31371 appears after the reference:
31374 \begin_layout Quote
31376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31379 key "latexcompanion"
31387 \begin_layout Standard
31388 All styles except for
31392 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31402 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31406 \begin_layout Standard
31407 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31408 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31409 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31414 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31415 multi-citation (so-called
31416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31419 qualified citation lists
31420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31426 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31431 dialog will display three columns in the field
31438 \begin_inset space ~
31446 \begin_inset space ~
31454 \begin_inset space ~
31460 If you double-click on an item's
31463 \begin_inset space ~
31471 \begin_inset space ~
31476 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31479 General text before
31485 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31488 \begin_layout Section
31490 \begin_inset Index idx
31493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31509 \begin_layout Standard
31510 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31514 \begin_inset space ~
31519 or the toolbar button
31526 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31527 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31528 by \SpecialChar LyX
31529 as the index entry.
31532 \begin_layout Standard
31533 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31536 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31538 \begin_inset space ~
31544 A light blue box labeled
31545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31556 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31557 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31561 \begin_layout Standard
31562 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31563 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31564 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31565 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31567 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31569 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31577 \begin_layout Subsection
31578 Grouping Index Entries
31579 \begin_inset Index idx
31582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31591 \begin_layout Standard
31592 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31594 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31595 lists under the entry
31596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31604 First we create the entry
31605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31613 \begin_inset space ~
31617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31619 reference "subsec:Lists"
31624 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31625 \begin_inset space ~
31629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31631 reference "sec:Itemize"
31635 , we insert the command
31638 \begin_layout Standard
31644 \begin_layout Standard
31648 \begin_layout Standard
31654 \begin_layout Standard
31655 for the enumerated list in section
31656 \begin_inset space ~
31660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31662 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31669 \begin_layout Standard
31670 The exclamation mark
31671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31678 marks the grouping levels.
31679 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31680 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31681 If we don't have an index entry for
31682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31689 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31692 \begin_layout Subsection
31694 \begin_inset Index idx
31697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31698 Index ! Page ranges
31706 \begin_layout Standard
31707 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31709 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31710 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31711 an index entry in section
31712 \begin_inset space ~
31716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31718 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31725 \begin_layout Standard
31728 Paragraph environments|(
31731 \begin_layout Standard
31732 and another entry at the end of section
31733 \begin_inset space ~
31737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31739 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31749 Paragraph environments|)
31752 \begin_layout Standard
31754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31777 respectively start and end the index range.
31778 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31779 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31780 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31781 An example is the index entry
31782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31785 Document ! Settings
31786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31792 \begin_layout Subsection
31794 \begin_inset Index idx
31797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 Index ! Cross referencing
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31807 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31808 We referred for example in the index entry
31809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31817 \begin_inset space ~
31821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31823 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31827 ) to the index entry
31828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31835 in the same section using the entry
31838 \begin_layout Standard
31841 GIF|see{Image formats}
31844 \begin_layout Standard
31845 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31847 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31848 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31851 \begin_layout Subsection
31853 \begin_inset Index idx
31856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 Index ! Entry order
31865 \begin_layout Standard
31866 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31867 follow the rules for the index order.
31868 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31874 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31876 \begin_inset space ~
31880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31882 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31891 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31892 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31917 \begin_inset Index idx
31920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31921 Dummy entries ! maïs
31927 \begin_inset Index idx
31930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31931 Dummy entries ! maître
31937 \begin_inset Index idx
31940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31941 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31946 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31947 maïs, maison, maître.
31948 To achieve this, we use the command
31951 \begin_layout Standard
31954 previous entry@current entry
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31958 In our case we want to have
31959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31974 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31977 \begin_layout Standard
31983 \begin_layout Standard
31984 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31985 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31987 See the next subsection for an example.
31990 \begin_layout Subsection
31992 \begin_inset Index idx
31995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31996 Index ! Entry layout
32004 \begin_layout Standard
32005 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32006 \begin_inset Index idx
32009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32012 This is an italic dummy entry
32017 You can also format the page number using the character
32018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32025 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32026 -command without a backslash.
32027 We can write for example
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32033 italic page number:|textit
32036 \begin_layout Standard
32037 to get the page number in italic.
32038 \begin_inset Index idx
32041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32042 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32047 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32048 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32066 \begin_inset space ~
32072 Have a look at section
32073 \begin_inset space ~
32077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32079 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32083 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32087 \begin_layout Standard
32088 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32096 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32100 to generate the index, see section
32101 \begin_inset space ~
32105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32107 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32116 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32121 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32122 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32125 key "latexcompanion"
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32139 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32141 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32142 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32143 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32144 If so, put the following in the preamble
32147 \begin_layout Standard
32159 \begin_layout Standard
32163 \begin_layout Standard
32169 \begin_layout Standard
32170 in the index entry.
32171 \begin_inset Index idx
32174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32175 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32180 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32181 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32182 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32185 \begin_layout Standard
32186 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32187 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32188 a bold font for all index entries.
32189 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32201 documentation for details,
32202 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32204 key "makeindex,xindy"
32212 \begin_layout Subsection
32214 \begin_inset Index idx
32217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32226 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32233 \begin_layout Standard
32234 If the index generation program
32238 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32239 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32243 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32244 distribution, is used.
32248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32253 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32254 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32255 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32256 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32257 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32267 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32269 dialog, see section
32270 \begin_inset space ~
32274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32276 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32281 The available options are listed and explained in
32282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32284 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32290 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32294 \begin_layout Standard
32295 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32296 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32300 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32304 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32305 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32308 \begin_layout Subsection
32312 \begin_layout Standard
32313 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32314 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32322 next to the standard index.
32324 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32325 that add this feature.
32332 \begin_inset Index idx
32335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32337 packages ! splitidx
32342 package to generate multiple indexes.
32343 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32349 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32351 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32359 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32360 style, but it also includes
32361 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32362 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32370 \begin_layout Standard
32371 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32372 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32378 and select the option
32380 Use multiple Indexes
32387 already contains the standard index
32388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32396 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32397 also appear as a heading) to the
32401 input field and press the
32406 The new index now also appears in the list.
32407 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32408 label color to the new index.
32411 \begin_layout Standard
32412 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32416 List/Contents/References
32422 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32423 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32424 are additional features:
32427 \begin_layout Itemize
32428 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32429 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32432 \begin_layout Itemize
32433 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32434 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32439 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32440 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32441 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32442 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32445 \begin_layout Itemize
32450 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32451 code in the name of the index.
32454 \begin_layout Section
32455 Nomenclature/Glossary
32456 \begin_inset Index idx
32459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32466 \begin_inset Index idx
32469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32500 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32507 \begin_layout Standard
32508 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32509 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32510 called nomenclature or glossary.
32513 \begin_layout Standard
32514 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32521 \begin_inset Index idx
32524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32532 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32541 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32545 \begin_layout Standard
32546 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32547 and then use the menu
32549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32555 \begin_inset space ~
32560 or the toolbar button
32563 arg "nomencl-insert"
32568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32579 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32582 \begin_layout Standard
32583 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32584 The first is the term or
32588 that you wish to define.
32593 of the term or symbol.
32596 \begin_layout Standard
32597 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32605 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32606 code for nomenclature entries the option
32610 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32618 \begin_layout Subsection
32619 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32620 \begin_inset Index idx
32623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32624 Nomenclature ! Layout
32632 \begin_layout Standard
32633 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32637 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32644 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32652 \begin_inset Newline newline
32660 \begin_inset Newline newline
32666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32673 character starts/ends the formula.
32674 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32675 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32687 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32697 \begin_layout Standard
32698 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32699 syntax is given in section
32700 \begin_inset space ~
32704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32706 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32713 \begin_layout Standard
32717 \begin_inset space ~
32722 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32724 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32729 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32736 in this document is:
32737 \begin_inset Newline newline
32742 dummy entry for the character
32747 \begin_inset Newline newline
32759 \begin_inset space ~
32769 font use the command
32798 \begin_layout Standard
32799 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32804 \begin_inset space \space{}
32808 \begin_inset Newline newline
32824 \begin_inset Newline newline
32827 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32828 This command will make the font of all symbols
32835 \begin_inset space ~
32843 \begin_layout Standard
32844 If the characters |
32845 \begin_inset space \space{}
32849 \begin_inset space \space{}
32853 \begin_inset space \space{}
32857 \begin_inset space \space{}
32861 \begin_inset space \space{}
32864 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32865 code they need to be escaped
32866 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32867 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32868 LatexCommand nomenclature
32869 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32870 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32878 \begin_layout Subsection
32879 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32880 \begin_inset Index idx
32883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32884 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32892 \begin_layout Standard
32893 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32894 -code of the symbol
32896 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32898 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32901 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32902 LatexCommand nomenclature
32904 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32912 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32916 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32917 LatexCommand nomenclature
32920 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32926 They will be sorted by
32927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32953 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32956 will be sorted before the
32960 since the character
32961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32968 is considered in sorting.
32971 \begin_layout Standard
32972 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32975 \begin_inset space ~
32980 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32981 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32983 For the example given, you can insert
32987 in this field for the
32988 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32995 will be located before
32996 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33002 \begin_layout Standard
33003 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33018 \begin_layout Subsection
33019 Nomenclature Options
33020 \begin_inset Index idx
33023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33024 Nomenclature ! Options
33030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33032 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33039 \begin_layout Standard
33044 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33045 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33048 \begin_layout Description
33049 refeq Appends the phrase
33050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33065 to every nomenclature entry, where
33071 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33074 \begin_layout Description
33075 refpage Appends the phrase
33076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33091 to every nomenclature entry, where
33097 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33100 \begin_layout Description
33101 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33104 \begin_layout Standard
33105 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33106 class options list in the
33108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33112 In this document the options
33119 \begin_layout Standard
33120 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33126 \begin_layout Standard
33127 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33128 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33133 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33136 \begin_layout Description
33146 \begin_layout Description
33149 nomrefpage Like the
33156 \begin_layout Description
33159 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33168 \begin_layout Description
33172 \begin_inset space ~
33178 \begin_inset space ~
33183 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33186 \begin_layout Standard
33188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33195 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33196 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33200 \begin_layout Standard
33209 \begin_inset Newline newline
33215 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33219 \begin_inset space ~
33231 unskip, see equation
33234 \begin_inset Newline newline
33241 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33242 \begin_inset Newline newline
33248 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33252 \begin_inset space ~
33269 \begin_layout Standard
33270 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33273 \begin_inset space ~
33278 in the document settings under
33281 \begin_inset space ~
33289 \begin_layout Standard
33297 \begin_inset Newline newline
33301 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33305 \begin_inset space ~
33317 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33319 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33320 \begin_inset Newline newline
33327 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33328 \begin_inset Newline newline
33332 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33336 \begin_inset space ~
33348 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33353 \begin_layout Subsection
33354 Printing the Nomenclature
33355 \begin_inset Index idx
33358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 Nomenclature ! Printing
33367 \begin_layout Standard
33368 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33371 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33387 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33388 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33389 You can choose between these settings:
33392 \begin_layout Description
33393 Default a space of 1
33394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33400 \begin_layout Description
33402 \begin_inset space ~
33406 \begin_inset space ~
33409 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33412 \begin_layout Description
33413 Custom custom space
33416 \begin_layout Standard
33417 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33426 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33434 For example, in order to change the name to
33438 , add the following line to the preamble:
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33454 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33457 \begin_layout Standard
33458 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33459 \begin_inset Newline newline
33474 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33477 \begin_layout Subsection
33478 Nomenclature Program
33479 \begin_inset Index idx
33482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33483 Nomenclature ! Program
33489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33491 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33498 \begin_layout Standard
33504 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33505 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33507 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33512 by adding options, see section
33513 \begin_inset space ~
33517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33519 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33524 The available options are listed and explained in
33525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33527 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33535 \begin_layout Section
33537 \begin_inset Index idx
33540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33547 \begin_inset Index idx
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33551 Document ! Branches
33557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33559 name "sec:Branches"
33566 \begin_layout Standard
33567 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33568 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33569 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33570 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33573 \begin_layout Standard
33574 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33575 allows you to put text into branches.
33576 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33577 To create a branch, either select the menu
33579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33580 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33583 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33592 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33593 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33594 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33595 and whether the name of the branch should
33596 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33597 (see below for an example).
33598 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33599 to the name of the other) and to add
33600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33612 \begin_inset space ~
33615 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33616 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33619 \begin_layout Standard
33620 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33621 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33626 where you can choose a branch.
33627 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33631 \begin_layout Standard
33632 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33633 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33636 \begin_layout Standard
33637 \begin_inset Branch Question
33641 \begin_layout Standard
33646 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33654 \begin_layout Standard
33655 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33659 \begin_layout Standard
33664 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33683 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33684 Consider for example a file
33685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33692 which has the above branches.
33694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33701 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33725 branch were inactive,
33726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33741 branch was active, likewise
33742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33757 branch was active, and
33758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33761 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33765 if both branches were active.
33766 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33767 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33773 \begin_layout Standard
33774 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33780 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33781 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33785 \begin_inset space ~
33793 \begin_layout Standard
33794 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33798 \begin_layout Standard
33804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33811 branch is deactivated.
33817 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33823 \begin_layout Standard
33824 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33825 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33826 definitions for each branch.
33827 For example you can define for the question branch
33831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33832 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33833 -syntax, see section
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33840 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33852 \begin_layout Standard
33862 \begin_layout Standard
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33873 and for the answer branch
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33896 \begin_layout Standard
33897 \begin_inset Branch Question
33901 \begin_layout Standard
33905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33933 \begin_layout Standard
33934 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33938 \begin_layout Standard
33942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33971 Now it is possible to use the
33975 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33982 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33985 commands to obtain conditional output.
33986 Here is an example formula where only the
33993 \begin_inset Formula
33995 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34003 \begin_layout Standard
34004 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34012 \begin_layout Standard
34013 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34019 \begin_inset space \space{}
34022 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34024 For this advanced usage, see the
34030 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34035 \begin_layout Section
34037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34039 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34044 \begin_inset Index idx
34047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34056 \begin_layout Standard
34059 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34060 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34063 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34065 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34071 \begin_inset Index idx
34074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34076 packages ! hyperref
34081 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34082 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34083 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34084 part of the document.
34088 \begin_layout Standard
34089 The header information in the dialog tab
34093 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34094 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34095 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34096 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34100 \begin_inset space ~
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34109 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34110 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34111 and author entries.
34115 \begin_inset space ~
34119 \begin_inset space ~
34123 \begin_inset space ~
34128 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34131 \begin_layout Standard
34132 You can specify in the dialog tab
34136 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34141 \begin_inset space ~
34145 \begin_inset space ~
34149 \begin_inset space ~
34154 option allows long links to be split;
34157 \begin_inset space ~
34161 \begin_inset space ~
34165 \begin_inset space ~
34173 \begin_inset space ~
34178 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34181 \begin_inset space ~
34186 colors the different links.
34187 The default colors are:
34190 \begin_layout Labeling
34191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34196 for hyperlinks and URLs
34199 \begin_layout Labeling
34200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34208 \begin_layout Labeling
34209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34218 but you can change these in the field
34223 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34229 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34237 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34238 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34239 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34242 \begin_layout Standard
34247 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34248 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34249 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34259 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34260 when opening the PDF.
34262 \begin_inset space ~
34265 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34266 \begin_inset space ~
34269 1 will only display the sections.
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34273 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34274 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34280 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34291 \begin_layout Section
34293 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34297 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34304 \begin_layout Subsection
34307 \begin_inset Index idx
34310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34320 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34327 \begin_layout Standard
34328 As \SpecialChar LyX
34329 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34330 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34331 commands and constructs,
34334 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34335 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34336 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34337 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34338 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34339 cannot support all packages and
34343 \begin_layout Standard
34344 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34345 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34346 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34350 Code box is created by the menu
34352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34354 \begin_inset space ~
34359 or by the toolbar button
34372 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34380 \begin_layout Standard
34381 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34383 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34385 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34390 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34395 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34402 , you can write the command part
34408 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34409 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34413 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34414 Code box behind the word.
34415 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34416 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34420 \begin_layout Standard
34421 \begin_inset Graphics
34422 filename clipart/ERT.png
34430 \begin_layout Standard
34434 \begin_layout Standard
34435 This is a line with a
34439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34462 \begin_layout Standard
34463 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34472 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34473 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34474 know that the command is finished.
34482 \begin_layout Subsection
34483 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34485 \begin_inset Argument 1
34488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34489 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34496 \begin_inset Index idx
34499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34509 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34516 \begin_layout Standard
34517 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34518 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34519 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34520 uses in the background.
34521 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34522 is based on commands, you can
34523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34531 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34532 any time if you know the right commands.
34533 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34534 is the end of the day.
34535 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34536 all caption labels bold.
34537 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34539 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34543 \begin_layout Standard
34544 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34546 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34548 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34561 \begin_layout Standard
34562 As result you find that the package
34567 \begin_inset Index idx
34570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34578 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34583 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34587 \begin_inset space ~
34595 \begin_layout Standard
34600 usepackage[options]{package name}
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34605 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34606 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34607 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34610 \begin_layout Standard
34611 In your case the package name is
34616 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34621 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34622 So you add the command
34625 \begin_layout Standard
34630 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34634 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34639 For more commands provided by the
34643 package, have a look at its documentation,
34644 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34662 For example if you use a
34666 class, you don't need the package
34670 , you can instead write
34673 \begin_layout Standard
34678 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34683 \begin_layout Standard
34684 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34685 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34686 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34693 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34696 \begin_layout Standard
34697 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34698 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34700 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34701 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34702 Code box as described in the previous
34706 \begin_layout Standard
34707 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34708 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34713 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34721 \begin_layout Standard
34722 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34728 \begin_layout Standard
34732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34742 \begin_inset Note Note
34745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34746 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34754 \begin_layout Left Header
34755 \begin_inset Argument 1
34758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34778 \begin_inset Note Note
34781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34782 defines the header line as described below
34790 \begin_layout Center Header
34791 \begin_inset Argument 1
34794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34803 \begin_layout Right Header
34804 \begin_inset Argument 1
34807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 \begin_layout Left Footer
34829 \begin_inset Argument 1
34832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34853 \begin_layout Center Footer
34854 \begin_inset Argument 1
34857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34869 \begin_inset Newline newline
34873 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34879 \begin_layout Right Footer
34880 \begin_inset Argument 1
34883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34905 \begin_layout Section
34906 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34909 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34914 \begin_inset Index idx
34917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34918 Document ! Header/Footer line
34924 \begin_inset Index idx
34927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34936 \begin_layout Standard
34937 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34958 \begin_inset space ~
34964 As a second step add in the menu
34966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34967 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34976 Custom Header/Footerlines
34979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34983 This module offers the following 6
34984 \begin_inset space ~
34990 \begin_layout Description
34992 \begin_inset space ~
34996 \begin_inset space ~
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35004 \begin_inset space ~
35008 \begin_inset space ~
35014 \begin_layout Description
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35024 \begin_inset space ~
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35039 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35040 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35043 \begin_layout Standard
35044 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35045 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35047 \begin_inset space ~
35051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35053 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35057 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35060 \begin_layout Standard
35061 \begin_inset Float figure
35068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35071 \begin_inset Tabular
35072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35073 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35074 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35076 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35096 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35125 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35136 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35140 The normal text on the page goes here.
35141 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35143 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35144 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35149 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35158 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35187 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35216 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35234 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35239 name "fig:Page-layout"
35243 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35256 \begin_layout Standard
35257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35265 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35274 is set to “Default”.
35275 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35284 \begin_layout Subsection
35288 \begin_layout Standard
35289 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35290 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35291 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35292 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35294 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35296 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35300 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35301 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35315 \begin_layout Description
35318 thepage prints the current page number
35321 \begin_layout Description
35324 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35327 \begin_layout Description
35330 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35333 \begin_layout Description
35336 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35337 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35344 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35347 because it usually goes in a left header.
35350 \begin_layout Description
35353 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35354 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35356 It is normally used in the right header.
35359 \begin_layout Subsection
35360 Default header/footer
35363 \begin_layout Standard
35364 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35365 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35366 footer has the page number.
35367 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35368 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35369 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35372 \begin_inset space ~
35380 \begin_layout Subsection
35384 \begin_layout Standard
35385 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35386 Some pages are different.
35387 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35388 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35389 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35390 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35391 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35395 Header and footer decoration line
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35399 By default, you get a 0.4
35400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35403 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35404 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35416 in the following way:
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35426 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35429 \begin_layout Standard
35430 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35443 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35450 \begin_layout Standard
35451 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35453 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35469 Several header/footer lines
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35473 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35474 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35475 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35477 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35493 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35510 headheight}{height}
35513 \begin_layout Standard
35518 is a size in standard units (e.
35519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35523 \begin_inset space \space{}
35531 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35532 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35533 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35534 logfile with the menu
35536 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35538 \begin_inset space ~
35546 \begin_inset space ~
35551 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35556 \begin_inset Index idx
35559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35561 packages ! fancyhdr
35567 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35568 for your header/footer.
35571 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35577 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35578 This example consists of the following definition:
35581 \begin_layout Description
35583 \begin_inset space ~
35592 , empty optional argument
35595 \begin_layout Description
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35600 Header empty, empty optional argument
35603 \begin_layout Description
35605 \begin_inset space ~
35614 in the optional argument
35617 \begin_layout Description
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35628 in the optional argument
35631 \begin_layout Description
35633 \begin_inset space ~
35646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35650 \begin_inset Newline newline
35654 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35661 in the optional argument
35664 \begin_layout Description
35666 \begin_inset space ~
35675 , empty optional argument
35678 \begin_layout Description
35681 headrulewidth set to 2
35682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35688 \begin_layout Standard
35689 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35690 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35706 \begin_layout Standard
35707 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35713 \begin_layout Standard
35717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35721 pagestyle{headings}
35727 \begin_inset Note Note
35730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35731 switches back to page style with the default headings
35739 \begin_layout Section
35740 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35743 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35748 \begin_inset Index idx
35751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35758 \begin_inset Index idx
35761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35770 \begin_layout Standard
35772 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35773 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35774 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35777 \begin_layout Subsection
35781 \begin_layout Standard
35782 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35788 \begin_inset Index idx
35791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35793 packages ! preview-latex
35798 (on some systems named simply
35803 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35805 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35812 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35814 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35822 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35823 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35824 -package are automatically
35825 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35829 \begin_layout Subsection
35833 \begin_layout Standard
35834 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35835 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35837 activate the option
35840 \begin_inset space ~
35847 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35853 \begin_inset space ~
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35860 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35885 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35888 \begin_layout Standard
35889 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35910 \begin_layout Standard
35911 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35912 and when you finish
35916 \begin_layout Standard
35917 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35925 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35926 generated by activating the option
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35935 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35943 \begin_layout Subsection
35944 Selected document parts
35947 \begin_layout Standard
35948 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35949 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35950 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35951 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35953 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35959 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35960 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35961 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35964 \begin_layout Standard
35965 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35972 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35984 is explained in section
35986 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35991 \begin_inset space ~
36001 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36002 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36003 the final rotated boxes,
36004 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36005 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36007 Here is the result:
36010 \begin_layout Standard
36011 \begin_inset Preview
36013 \begin_layout Standard
36018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36022 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36028 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36038 height_special "totalheight"
36043 backgroundcolor "none"
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36071 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36077 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36099 \begin_layout Standard
36100 Previewing works also for colors.
36101 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36120 is explained in section
36127 \begin_inset space ~
36140 \begin_layout Standard
36141 \begin_inset Preview
36143 \begin_layout Standard
36147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36166 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36171 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36190 \begin_layout Standard
36191 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36197 \begin_layout Standard
36198 If \SpecialChar LyX
36199 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36200 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36201 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36202 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36203 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36204 the \SpecialChar TeX
36206 If \SpecialChar LyX
36207 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36208 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36210 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36211 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36212 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36215 \begin_layout Subsection
36220 \begin_layout Standard
36221 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36222 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36225 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36232 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36234 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36236 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36237 's main window, then only this selection
36238 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36239 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36240 the source view window.
36245 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36246 ; but note that if you have
36247 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36249 not just the one which is open at the time.
36252 \begin_layout Section
36253 Advanced Find and Replace
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36256 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36261 \begin_inset Index idx
36264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36271 \begin_inset Index idx
36274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36283 \begin_layout Subsection
36287 \begin_layout Standard
36288 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36289 allows for searching of complex,
36290 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36292 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36293 The key-features are:
36296 \begin_layout Itemize
36297 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36298 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36299 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36303 \begin_layout Itemize
36304 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36305 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36306 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36307 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36310 \begin_layout Itemize
36311 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36312 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36313 outside of mathematics environments
36316 \begin_layout Itemize
36317 Search may be widened to a specific
36322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36326 \begin_inset space ~
36329 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36330 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36337 \begin_layout Itemize
36338 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36339 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36344 \begin_inset space ~
36347 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36350 \begin_layout Subsection
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36355 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36357 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36370 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36373 ) or the toolbar button
36376 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36382 Advanced Find and Replace
36387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36391 \begin_layout Standard
36397 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36406 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36409 arg "paragraph-break"
36413 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36414 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36418 arg "paragraph-break"
36421 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36425 searches backwards.
36428 \begin_layout Standard
36432 \begin_inset space ~
36437 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36451 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36455 Searching for mathematics
36458 \begin_layout Standard
36459 Mathematical formulas, such as
36460 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36463 or something more complex like
36464 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36467 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36472 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36473 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36474 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36475 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36485 \begin_layout Standard
36486 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36487 This is done by switching to the
36491 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36496 This way, entering in the
36503 \begin_layout Itemize
36504 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36505 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36508 \begin_layout Itemize
36509 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36510 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36513 \begin_layout Itemize
36514 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36515 of it only within section headings.
36516 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36517 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36521 \begin_layout Itemize
36522 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36523 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36530 \begin_layout Standard
36531 The entries made in the
36535 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36544 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36548 button or alternatively press
36551 arg "paragraph-break"
36558 while the cursor is in the
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_layout Standard
36570 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36572 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36576 \begin_layout Itemize
36577 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36578 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36586 with its typewriter version
36587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36601 \begin_layout Itemize
36602 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36608 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36620 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36627 (you may want to enable the
36630 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_inset space ~
36643 options and disable the
36651 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36659 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36660 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36664 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36667 , or occurrences of
36668 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36672 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36678 \begin_layout Subsection
36682 \begin_layout Standard
36683 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36688 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36690 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36692 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36702 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36708 This is done with the context menu
36710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36711 Insert Regular Expression
36713 while the cursor is in the
36718 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36719 expression matching rules
36723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36724 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36731 \begin_inset space ~
36734 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36735 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36741 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36742 same text in the document.
36743 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36744 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36747 \begin_layout Enumerate
36748 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36753 editor the fraction
36754 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36758 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36761 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36762 fractions with the given denominator.
36765 \begin_layout Enumerate
36766 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36778 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36783 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36784 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36785 Also, by inserting a
36786 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36789 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36790 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36794 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36795 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36796 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36799 , and referring back to them through
36800 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36804 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36808 For example, try searching with the regexp
36809 \begin_inset Newline newline
36812 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36815 \begin_inset Newline newline
36818 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36821 \begin_layout Standard
36822 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36834 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36835 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36836 sub-expressions is absolute.
36838 \begin_inset space ~
36842 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36845 always refers to the first occurrence of
36846 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36849 in all entered regexps.
36857 \begin_layout Section
36859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36861 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36866 \begin_inset Index idx
36869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36878 \begin_layout Standard
36880 has a built-in spell checker.
36883 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36890 key or the toolbar button
36893 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36896 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36897 beginning of the currently selected text.
36898 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36899 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36900 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36901 scrolled so that it is visible.
36902 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36903 n, if any could be found.
36904 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36908 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36909 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36912 \begin_layout Standard
36913 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36920 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36921 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36923 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36924 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36927 \begin_inset space ~
36935 arg "dialog-show character"
36938 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36940 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36943 \begin_layout Standard
36944 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36945 can be downloaded from here:
36946 \begin_inset Newline newline
36950 \begin_inset Flex URL
36953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36955 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36961 \begin_inset Newline newline
36965 \begin_inset space ~
36968 files for each language.
36969 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36970 \begin_inset space ~
36973 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36974 's installation subfolder
36982 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36984 \begin_inset Newline newline
36987 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36988 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36989 but in most cases these are
37005 is the language code.
37008 \begin_layout Subsection
37012 \begin_layout Standard
37015 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37016 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37021 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37024 you can set the following things:
37027 \begin_layout Description
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37032 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37033 should use for spell checking.
37034 Depending on your platform,
37044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37045 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37046 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37061 \begin_inset space ~
37064 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37067 \begin_layout Description
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37072 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37073 will always use the given language
37074 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37077 \begin_layout Description
37079 \begin_inset space ~
37082 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37088 \begin_inset space \space{}
37092 This should normally not be needed.
37095 \begin_layout Description
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37104 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37116 \begin_layout Description
37118 \begin_inset space ~
37121 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37122 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37123 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37124 appear in a context menu.
37125 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37129 \begin_layout Description
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37142 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37146 \begin_layout Section
37148 \begin_inset Index idx
37151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37160 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37167 \begin_layout Standard
37169 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37170 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37182 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37192 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37194 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37195 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37196 which are available for many languages.
37199 \begin_layout Standard
37200 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37201 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37205 \begin_layout Subsection
37206 Setting up the thesaurus
37209 \begin_layout Standard
37218 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37222 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37227 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37233 \begin_inset space ~
37241 For instance, the US English files are named:
37244 \begin_layout Itemize
37248 \begin_layout Itemize
37252 \begin_layout Standard
37261 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37262 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37265 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37266 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37267 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37274 ) to the path where they are installed.
37278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37279 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37280 ies, typical locations are
37286 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37290 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37294 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37297 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37303 LibreOffice-<Version>
37310 On the Mac, the default location is
37312 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37313 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37314 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37315 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37316 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37317 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37325 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37326 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37327 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37331 \begin_layout Standard
37332 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37333 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37335 \begin_inset Newline newline
37339 \begin_inset Flex URL
37342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37344 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37352 \begin_layout Standard
37353 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37354 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37356 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37357 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37358 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37365 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37367 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37368 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37372 \begin_layout Standard
37373 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37375 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37378 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37384 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37387 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37388 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37396 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37397 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37398 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37405 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37408 \begin_layout Subsection
37409 Using the thesaurus
37412 \begin_layout Standard
37413 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37415 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37418 or the toolbar button
37421 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37424 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37426 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37428 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37429 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37430 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37439 ), related terms (such as
37442 \begin_inset space ~
37451 ), compounds (such as
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37463 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37472 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37475 \begin_layout Standard
37476 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37477 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37481 \begin_layout Standard
37482 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37483 the dictionary, such as the above
37487 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37492 \begin_inset space \space{}
37495 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37496 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37497 For example, looking up the word form
37501 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37506 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37511 \begin_inset space \space{}
37522 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37523 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37524 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37527 \begin_layout Section
37529 \begin_inset Index idx
37532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37539 \begin_inset Index idx
37542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37543 Document ! Change Tracking
37549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37551 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37558 \begin_layout Standard
37559 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37560 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37561 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37562 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37569 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37579 \begin_layout Standard
37580 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37594 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37595 You can change the color in
37597 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37598 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37600 \begin_inset space ~
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37609 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37615 \begin_inset Index idx
37618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37619 Color ! Change tracking
37624 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37625 's status bar when the
37626 cursor is in changed text.
37627 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37630 arg "changes-merge"
37636 \begin_layout Standard
37637 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37639 \begin_inset Index idx
37642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37651 \begin_layout Standard
37652 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37658 \begin_layout Standard
37659 \begin_inset Graphics
37660 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37668 \begin_layout Standard
37669 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37675 \begin_layout Standard
37676 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37679 \begin_layout Standard
37680 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37686 \begin_layout Standard
37687 \begin_inset Tabular
37688 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37689 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37690 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37691 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37701 arg "changes-track"
37709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37720 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37722 \begin_inset space ~
37731 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37740 arg "changes-output"
37748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37759 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37761 \begin_inset space ~
37765 \begin_inset space ~
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37799 Jumps to the next change
37805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37814 arg "change-accept"
37822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37828 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37833 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37835 \begin_inset space ~
37844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37853 arg "change-reject"
37861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37869 \begin_inset space ~
37872 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37874 \begin_inset space ~
37883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 arg "changes-merge"
37900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37908 \begin_inset space ~
37911 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37913 \begin_inset space ~
37922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37931 arg "all-changes-accept"
37939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37947 \begin_inset space ~
37950 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37974 arg "all-changes-reject"
37982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37990 \begin_inset space ~
37993 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38032 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38034 \begin_inset space ~
38043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38066 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38084 \begin_layout Standard
38085 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38091 \begin_layout Standard
38092 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38114 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38115 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38116 the next change after the current cursor position.
38117 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38118 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38119 step to the next change.
38120 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38123 \begin_layout Standard
38124 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38125 to describe a change.
38128 \begin_layout Standard
38129 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38135 \begin_inset Index idx
38138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38146 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38148 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38155 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38159 \begin_layout Section
38160 Comparison of Documents
38161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38163 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38168 \begin_inset Index idx
38171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38172 Comparison of documents
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38184 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38188 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38189 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38191 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38193 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38197 \begin_inset space ~
38201 \begin_inset space ~
38205 \begin_inset space ~
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38218 \begin_inset space ~
38222 \begin_inset space ~
38226 \begin_inset space ~
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38234 \begin_inset space ~
38239 enables the change tracking option
38242 \begin_inset space ~
38246 \begin_inset space ~
38250 \begin_inset space ~
38255 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38258 \begin_layout Section
38259 International Support
38260 \begin_inset Index idx
38263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38264 International support
38272 \begin_layout Standard
38273 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38274 with any language you want.
38275 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38276 up \SpecialChar LyX
38278 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38280 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38288 \begin_layout Standard
38289 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38290 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38291 \begin_inset space ~
38295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38297 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38304 \begin_layout Subsection
38306 \begin_inset Index idx
38309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38316 \begin_inset Index idx
38319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38320 Document ! Settings
38326 \begin_inset Index idx
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38330 Document ! Language
38338 \begin_layout Standard
38341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38345 dialog lets you set
38347 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38357 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38367 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38368 For details about the different encoding options see section
38369 \begin_inset space ~
38373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38375 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38382 \begin_layout Subsection
38383 Keyboard mapping configuration
38384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38386 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38394 If you have for example a U.
38395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38398 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38399 can use an alternate keymap.
38400 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38405 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38406 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38407 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38410 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38411 \begin_inset space ~
38415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38417 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38422 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38423 which one you want to use.
38426 \begin_layout Standard
38427 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38428 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38429 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38433 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38434 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38435 one to support the characters you want.
38436 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38443 \begin_layout Chapter
38446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38448 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38455 \begin_layout Standard
38456 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38457 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38458 topic inside the user's guide.
38461 \begin_layout Section
38463 \begin_inset Index idx
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 \begin_layout Standard
38480 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38483 \begin_layout Subsection
38487 \begin_layout Standard
38488 Creates a new document.
38491 \begin_layout Subsection
38495 \begin_layout Standard
38496 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38497 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38498 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38500 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38501 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38507 \begin_layout Subsection
38511 \begin_layout Standard
38515 \begin_layout Subsection
38519 \begin_layout Standard
38520 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38521 Click there on a file to open it.
38524 \begin_layout Subsection
38526 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38530 \begin_layout Standard
38532 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38533 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38537 \begin_layout Subsection
38541 \begin_layout Standard
38542 Closes the current document.
38545 \begin_layout Subsection
38549 \begin_layout Standard
38550 Closes all opened documents.
38553 \begin_layout Subsection
38557 \begin_layout Standard
38558 Saves the actual document.
38561 \begin_layout Subsection
38565 \begin_layout Standard
38566 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38567 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38571 \begin_layout Subsection
38573 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38577 \begin_layout Standard
38579 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38580 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38586 \begin_layout Subsection
38590 \begin_layout Standard
38591 Saves all opened documents.
38594 \begin_layout Subsection
38598 \begin_layout Standard
38599 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38602 \begin_layout Subsection
38606 \begin_layout Standard
38607 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38608 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38609 It is described in the section
38611 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38616 Additional Features
38621 \begin_layout Subsection
38625 \begin_layout Standard
38626 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38627 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38629 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38630 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38634 \begin_layout Standard
38635 When using the menu entry
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38643 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38647 \begin_inset space ~
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38660 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38661 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38664 \begin_layout Subsection
38666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38668 name "subsec:Export"
38675 \begin_layout Standard
38676 You can export your document to various file formats.
38677 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38679 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38680 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38681 during its configuration.
38684 \begin_layout Standard
38685 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38687 \begin_inset space ~
38691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38693 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38700 \begin_layout Description
38706 \begin_inset space ~
38709 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38714 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38715 \begin_inset Newline newline
38718 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38719 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38723 \begin_layout Description
38724 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38730 \begin_layout Description
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38735 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38741 \begin_layout Description
38742 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38743 's native DVI-format.
38744 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38745 files paths or file names in your document.
38747 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38754 \begin_layout Description
38755 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38756 in files paths or file names
38759 \begin_layout Description
38761 \begin_inset space ~
38768 ) DVI-format using the program
38770 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38773 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38777 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38785 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38793 \begin_layout Description
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38798 (cropped) the same as
38802 but with cropped page margins.
38805 \begin_layout Description
38807 \begin_inset space ~
38810 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38814 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38819 \begin_layout Description
38823 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38839 \begin_layout Description
38841 \begin_inset space ~
38845 \begin_inset space ~
38848 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38852 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38860 \begin_layout Description
38864 \begin_inset space ~
38873 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38874 source that is compilable with the program
38876 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38880 \begin_layout Description
38884 \begin_inset space ~
38889 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38890 source, additionally all images used in the document
38891 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38895 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38898 \begin_layout Description
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38907 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38908 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38909 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38917 \begin_layout Description
38921 \begin_inset space ~
38930 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38931 source that is compilable with the program
38937 \begin_layout Description
38939 \begin_inset space ~
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38950 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38951 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38957 \begin_layout Description
38959 \begin_inset space ~
38962 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38963 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38969 \begin_inset space \space{}
38974 \begin_inset space ~
38978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38993 represent the version number)
38996 \begin_layout Description
38998 \begin_inset space ~
39002 \begin_inset space ~
39005 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39006 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39007 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39011 \begin_layout Description
39012 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39013 's internal XHTML engine
39016 \begin_layout Description
39018 \begin_inset space ~
39022 \begin_inset space ~
39026 \begin_inset space ~
39030 \begin_inset space ~
39033 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39038 For the conversion the program
39047 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39050 \begin_layout Description
39051 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39056 \begin_layout Description
39058 \begin_inset space ~
39061 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39063 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39066 For the conversion the program
39075 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39078 \begin_layout Description
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39083 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39084 For the conversion the program
39093 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39096 \begin_layout Description
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39101 (cropped) the same as
39104 \begin_inset space ~
39109 but with cropped page margins
39112 \begin_layout Description
39116 \begin_inset space ~
39121 PDF-format using the program
39125 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39128 \begin_layout Description
39132 \begin_inset space ~
39136 \begin_inset space ~
39144 \begin_inset space ~
39149 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39154 \begin_inset space \space{}
39157 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39161 \begin_layout Description
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39170 PDF-format using the program
39172 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39175 , produces PDF-files directly
39178 \begin_layout Description
39182 \begin_inset space ~
39187 PDF-format using the program
39191 , produces PDF-files directly
39194 \begin_layout Description
39198 \begin_inset space ~
39203 PDF-format using the program
39207 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39210 \begin_layout Description
39214 \begin_inset space ~
39219 PDF-format using the program
39224 , produces PDF-files directly
39227 \begin_layout Description
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39239 \begin_layout Description
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39252 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39253 and then exported as text using the program
39258 \begin_layout Description
39263 PostScript format using the program
39271 options see section
39272 \begin_inset space ~
39276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39278 reference "subsec:General-output"
39285 \begin_layout Description
39286 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39287 source and also code in the statistical programming
39301 it is possible to use
39305 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39309 \begin_layout Standard
39310 If one of the menu entries
39317 \begin_inset space ~
39326 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39328 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39330 \begin_inset space ~
39334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39336 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39341 \begin_inset Index idx
39344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39345 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39354 \begin_layout Subsection
39358 \begin_layout Standard
39359 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39360 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39363 \begin_inset space ~
39367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39369 reference "sec:Paths"
39374 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39383 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39384 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39385 's preferences as described in section
39386 \begin_inset space ~
39390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39392 reference "subsec:Converters"
39399 \begin_layout Subsection
39400 New and Close Window
39403 \begin_layout Standard
39404 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39408 \begin_layout Subsection
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39413 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39416 \begin_layout Section
39418 \begin_inset Index idx
39421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39430 \begin_layout Subsection
39434 \begin_layout Standard
39435 Described in section
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39442 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39449 \begin_layout Subsection
39450 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39453 \begin_layout Standard
39454 Described in section
39455 \begin_inset space ~
39459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39461 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39468 \begin_layout Subsection
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39473 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39474 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39477 \begin_layout Subsection
39481 \begin_layout Standard
39482 Selects the whole document.
39485 \begin_layout Subsection
39486 Find & Replace (Quick)
39489 \begin_layout Standard
39490 Described in section
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39497 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39504 \begin_layout Subsection
39505 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39508 \begin_layout Standard
39509 Described in section
39510 \begin_inset space ~
39514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39516 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39523 \begin_layout Subsection
39524 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39527 \begin_layout Standard
39528 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39532 \begin_layout Subsection
39534 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39538 \begin_layout Standard
39540 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39541 Described in section
39542 \begin_inset space ~
39546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39548 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39557 \begin_layout Subsection
39559 \begin_inset Index idx
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 Paragraph ! Settings
39571 \begin_layout Standard
39572 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39573 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39577 \begin_layout Standard
39578 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39579 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39594 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39598 \begin_layout Subsection
39600 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39604 \begin_layout Standard
39606 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39607 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39612 \begin_layout Enumerate
39614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39615 Customize text properties by means of the
39621 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39624 ; this is described in section
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39631 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39638 \begin_layout Enumerate
39640 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39641 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39643 Apply last settings
39646 \begin_layout Enumerate
39648 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39649 Change the casing of selected text (
39664 \begin_layout Subsection
39666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39670 \begin_layout Standard
39672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39673 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39674 text styles (in the case of this document:
39696 \begin_inset space ~
39700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39702 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39711 \begin_layout Subsection
39712 Table and Rows & Columns
39715 \begin_layout Standard
39716 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39717 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39718 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39721 \begin_layout Subsection
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39727 It will dissolve this inset.
39728 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39732 \begin_layout Subsection
39736 \begin_layout Standard
39737 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39738 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39741 \begin_layout Subsection
39742 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39745 \begin_layout Standard
39746 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39748 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39749 \begin_inset space ~
39753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39755 reference "sec:Nesting"
39760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39762 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39769 \begin_layout Section
39771 \begin_inset Index idx
39774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39783 \begin_layout Standard
39784 At the bottom of the
39788 menu the opened documents are listed.
39791 \begin_layout Subsection
39792 Open/Close all Insets
39795 \begin_layout Standard
39796 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39799 \begin_layout Subsection
39800 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39803 \begin_layout Standard
39804 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39807 \begin_layout Standard
39808 Math macros are described in the
39815 \begin_layout Subsection
39819 \begin_layout Standard
39820 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39827 reference "sec:Navigating"
39832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39834 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39841 \begin_layout Subsection
39845 \begin_layout Standard
39846 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39848 \begin_inset space ~
39852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39854 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39861 \begin_layout Subsection
39865 \begin_layout Standard
39866 Opens a window showing console messages.
39867 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39872 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39873 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39874 is processing the document.
39877 \begin_layout Subsection
39879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39881 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39886 \begin_inset Index idx
39889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39898 \begin_layout Standard
39899 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39901 All toolbars and the
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39909 can be turned on and off.
39914 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39943 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39947 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39954 \begin_layout Standard
39959 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39963 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39964 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39965 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39966 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39967 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39970 \begin_layout Standard
39972 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39979 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39986 \begin_layout Subsection
39990 \begin_layout Standard
39994 \begin_inset space ~
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40002 \begin_inset space ~
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40014 \begin_inset space ~
40019 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40020 's main window vertically while
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40031 \begin_inset space ~
40035 \begin_inset space ~
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40048 will split it horizontally.
40049 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40050 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40051 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40052 three or more documents at the same time.
40053 To close a split view, use the menu
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40060 \begin_inset space ~
40068 \begin_layout Subsection
40072 \begin_layout Standard
40073 Closes a split view.
40076 \begin_layout Subsection
40080 \begin_layout Standard
40081 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40082 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40083 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40084 's main window fullscreen.
40085 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40086 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40089 \begin_layout Section
40091 \begin_inset Index idx
40094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40103 \begin_layout Subsection
40107 \begin_layout Standard
40108 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40115 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40126 \begin_layout Subsection
40128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40130 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40137 \begin_layout Standard
40138 Here you can insert the following characters:
40141 \begin_layout Description
40146 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40149 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40150 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40151 -packages you have installed.
40152 You can get a complete display by checking
40155 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset Newline newline
40165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40173 Not all characters will be visible in the
40177 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40178 dialog (see section
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40185 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40189 ) can display every character.
40197 \begin_layout Description
40198 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40202 \begin_layout Description
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40211 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40218 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40225 \begin_layout Description
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40230 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40234 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40240 \begin_layout Description
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40245 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40248 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40249 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40255 \begin_layout Description
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40260 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40264 \begin_layout Description
40266 \begin_inset space ~
40269 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40273 \begin_layout Description
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40278 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40284 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40290 \begin_layout Description
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40295 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40299 \begin_layout Description
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40305 \begin_inset Index idx
40308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40315 \begin_inset Index idx
40318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40319 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40324 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40325 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40327 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40333 \begin_inset Index idx
40336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40344 \begin_inset Newline newline
40347 More information about this feature can be found in the
40353 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40359 \begin_layout Description
40360 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40362 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40363 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40367 \begin_layout Subsection
40371 \begin_layout Standard
40372 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40375 \begin_layout Description
40376 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40377 \begin_inset script superscript
40379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40388 \begin_layout Description
40389 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40390 \begin_inset script subscript
40392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40401 \begin_layout Description
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40406 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40407 \begin_inset space ~
40411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40413 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40420 \begin_layout Description
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40425 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40426 \begin_inset space ~
40430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40432 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40439 \begin_layout Description
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40444 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40451 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40458 \begin_layout Description
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40463 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40469 \begin_inset space \space{}
40472 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40473 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40482 To insert a fraction use the command
40487 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40491 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40500 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40507 \begin_layout Description
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40512 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40513 \begin_inset space ~
40517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40519 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40526 \begin_layout Description
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40531 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40538 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40545 \begin_layout Description
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40550 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40551 \begin_inset space ~
40555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40557 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40564 \begin_layout Description
40565 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40572 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40579 \begin_layout Description
40581 \begin_inset space ~
40584 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40585 \begin_inset space ~
40589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40591 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40598 \begin_layout Description
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40603 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40610 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40617 \begin_layout Description
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40623 \begin_inset space ~
40626 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40629 \begin_inset space ~
40633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40635 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40642 for a usage example.
40645 \begin_layout Description
40647 \begin_inset space ~
40651 \begin_inset space ~
40654 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40655 \begin_inset space ~
40659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40661 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40668 \begin_layout Description
40670 \begin_inset space ~
40673 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40674 as described in section
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40681 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40688 \begin_layout Description
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40693 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40700 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40707 \begin_layout Description
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40712 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40713 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40721 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40728 \begin_layout Description
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40733 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40740 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40747 \begin_layout Description
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40756 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40763 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40770 \begin_layout Subsection
40772 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40776 \begin_layout Standard
40778 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40779 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40780 The submenu allows you to insert
40783 \begin_layout Description
40785 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40790 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40793 \begin_layout Description
40795 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40804 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40808 \begin_layout Description
40810 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40815 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40818 \begin_layout Description
40820 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40822 \begin_inset space ~
40825 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40828 \begin_layout Description
40830 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40839 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40843 \begin_layout Description
40845 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40850 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40853 \begin_layout Description
40855 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40861 \begin_inset space ~
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40868 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40871 \begin_layout Description
40873 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40878 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40880 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40881 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40887 \begin_layout Description
40889 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40894 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40896 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40897 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40903 \begin_layout Description
40905 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40906 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40907 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40908 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40911 \begin_layout Subsection
40914 List/Contents/References
40917 \begin_layout Standard
40918 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40943 are described in section
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40950 reference "sec:toc"
40959 is described in section
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40966 reference "sec:Index"
40974 is described in section
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40981 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40987 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40990 is described in section
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40997 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41004 \begin_layout Subsection
41008 \begin_layout Standard
41009 To insert floats, as described in section
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41016 reference "sec:Floats"
41020 and in detail the chapter
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41035 \begin_layout Subsection
41039 \begin_layout Standard
41040 To insert notes, described in section
41041 \begin_inset space ~
41045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41047 reference "sec:Notes"
41054 \begin_layout Subsection
41058 \begin_layout Standard
41059 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41061 Branches are described in section
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41068 reference "sec:Branches"
41075 \begin_layout Subsection
41079 \begin_layout Standard
41080 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41081 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41083 An example is the document class
41084 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41094 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41103 with three custom insets.
41106 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41110 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41116 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41119 \begin_layout Subsection
41121 \begin_inset Index idx
41124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41133 \begin_layout Standard
41134 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41136 For more information see chapter
41138 External Document Parts
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41147 \begin_layout Subsection
41149 \begin_inset Index idx
41152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41161 \begin_layout Standard
41162 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41163 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41170 \begin_inset space ~
41178 \begin_layout Subsection
41182 \begin_layout Standard
41187 dialog as described in section
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41194 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41201 \begin_layout Subsection
41205 \begin_layout Standard
41210 as described in section
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41217 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41224 \begin_layout Subsection
41228 \begin_layout Standard
41233 as described in section
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41240 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41247 \begin_layout Subsection
41249 \begin_inset Index idx
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41259 \begin_inset Index idx
41262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41263 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41271 \begin_layout Standard
41272 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41273 Floats are described in section
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41280 reference "sec:Floats"
41284 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41286 Multi-page Captions
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_layout Subsection
41303 \begin_layout Standard
41304 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41311 reference "sec:Index"
41318 \begin_layout Subsection
41322 \begin_layout Standard
41323 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41330 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41337 \begin_layout Subsection
41341 \begin_layout Standard
41342 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41343 Tables are described in section
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41350 reference "sec:Tables"
41354 and in detail in the chapter
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_layout Subsection
41373 \begin_layout Standard
41379 Graphics are described in section
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41386 reference "sec:Graphics"
41393 \begin_layout Subsection
41397 \begin_layout Standard
41398 Inserts a URL as described in section
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41405 reference "subsec:URLs"
41412 \begin_layout Subsection
41416 \begin_layout Standard
41417 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41418 \begin_inset space ~
41422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41424 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41431 \begin_layout Subsection
41435 \begin_layout Standard
41436 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41443 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41450 \begin_layout Subsection
41454 \begin_layout Standard
41455 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41456 \begin_inset space ~
41460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41462 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41469 \begin_layout Subsection
41472 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41475 \begin_layout Standard
41476 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41477 environments of the same type.
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41485 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41489 for an explanation.
41492 \begin_layout Subsection
41496 \begin_layout Standard
41497 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41498 title or caption of a float.
41499 Inserts a short title as described in section
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41506 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41513 \begin_layout Subsection
41518 \begin_layout Standard
41519 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41520 Code box as described in section
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41527 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41534 \begin_layout Subsection
41536 \begin_inset Index idx
41539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41548 \begin_layout Standard
41549 Inserts a program listings box.
41550 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41552 Program Code Listings
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41565 \begin_layout Subsection
41567 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41571 \begin_layout Standard
41573 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41574 Inserts the actual date.
41575 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41582 \begin_layout Subsection
41586 \begin_layout Standard
41587 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41588 \begin_inset space ~
41592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41594 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41601 \begin_layout Section
41603 \begin_inset Index idx
41606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 \begin_layout Standard
41616 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41620 of the current document.
41621 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41624 \begin_layout Subsection
41628 \begin_layout Standard
41629 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41630 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41631 to jump, for example, between section
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41636 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41640 2.5 and use the submenu
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41660 \begin_inset space ~
41664 \begin_inset space ~
41670 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41674 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41680 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41683 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41686 \begin_layout Standard
41687 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41696 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41704 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41707 \begin_layout Subsection
41708 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41711 \begin_layout Standard
41712 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41716 \begin_layout Subsection
41720 \begin_layout Standard
41721 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41722 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41723 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41727 \begin_inset space ~
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41739 \begin_layout Subsection
41743 \begin_layout Standard
41744 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41747 The \SpecialChar LyX
41748 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41750 \begin_inset space ~
41758 \begin_inset space ~
41763 manual for a detailed description.
41766 \begin_layout Section
41768 \begin_inset Index idx
41771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41780 \begin_layout Subsection
41784 \begin_layout Standard
41785 Change Tracking is described in section
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41792 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41799 \begin_layout Subsection
41807 \begin_layout Standard
41808 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41809 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41810 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41812 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41813 to the clipboard or update the view.
41814 \begin_inset Newline newline
41817 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41821 \begin_layout Standard
41824 Open Containing Directory
41826 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41827 's temporary folder for the document.
41828 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41829 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41830 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41831 For example some journals require to send the
41835 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41839 \begin_layout Subsection
41840 Start Appendix Here
41843 \begin_layout Standard
41844 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41845 as described in section
41846 \begin_inset space ~
41850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41852 reference "sec:Appendices"
41859 \begin_layout Subsection
41861 \begin_inset space ~
41867 \begin_layout Standard
41868 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41869 default output format for the document (menu
41871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41872 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41873 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41875 \begin_inset space ~
41879 \begin_inset space ~
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41891 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41895 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41898 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41899 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41901 \begin_inset space ~
41904 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41906 \begin_inset space ~
41909 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41911 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset space ~
41925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41927 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41931 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41932 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41934 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41935 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41940 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41945 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41955 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41960 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41961 when it is first configured.
41962 The default output format is
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41973 \begin_layout Subsection
41974 View (Other Formats)
41977 \begin_layout Standard
41978 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41979 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41980 actual document with an external program.
41981 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41982 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41983 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41985 All possible formats are listed in section
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41992 reference "subsec:Export"
41997 You should at least see the menu entry
42002 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42004 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42012 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42017 \begin_inset Index idx
42020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42021 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42030 \begin_layout Standard
42031 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42032 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42034 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42035 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42040 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42042 \begin_inset space ~
42045 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42049 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42055 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42060 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42061 when it is first configured.
42064 \begin_layout Subsection
42066 \begin_inset space ~
42072 \begin_layout Standard
42073 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42074 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42077 \begin_layout Subsection
42078 Update (Other Formats)
42081 \begin_layout Standard
42082 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42083 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42086 \begin_layout Subsection
42087 View Master Document
42090 \begin_layout Standard
42091 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42112 manual for more information on this topic).
42113 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42114 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42118 \begin_inset space ~
42122 \begin_inset space ~
42127 generates the output of the whole book, while
42131 will just output the chapter alone.
42134 \begin_layout Standard
42135 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42136 in the document settings (menu
42138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42139 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42140 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42142 \begin_inset space ~
42146 \begin_inset space ~
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42158 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42162 ) or in the preferences (menu
42164 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42165 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42170 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42175 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42177 \begin_inset space ~
42181 \begin_inset space ~
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42193 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42200 \begin_layout Subsection
42201 Update Master Document
42204 \begin_layout Standard
42205 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42226 manual for more information on this topic).
42227 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42228 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42231 \begin_layout Standard
42232 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42233 in the document settings (menu
42235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42236 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42237 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42239 \begin_inset space ~
42243 \begin_inset space ~
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42255 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42259 ) or in the preferences (menu
42261 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42262 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42267 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42269 \begin_inset space ~
42272 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42274 \begin_inset space ~
42278 \begin_inset space ~
42284 \begin_inset space ~
42288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42290 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42297 \begin_layout Subsection
42299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42301 name "subsec:Compressed"
42308 \begin_layout Standard
42309 Un/compresses the current document.
42310 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42311 compression (see the
42313 Additional Features
42315 manual for details).
42318 \begin_layout Subsection
42322 \begin_layout Standard
42323 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42326 \begin_layout Subsection
42330 \begin_layout Standard
42331 The document settings are described in appendix
42332 \begin_inset space ~
42336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42338 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42345 \begin_layout Section
42347 \begin_inset Index idx
42350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42359 \begin_layout Subsection
42363 \begin_layout Standard
42364 Spell checking is explained in section
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42371 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42378 \begin_layout Subsection
42382 \begin_layout Standard
42383 The thesaurus is described in section
42384 \begin_inset space ~
42388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42390 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42397 \begin_layout Subsection
42399 \begin_inset Index idx
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42409 \begin_inset Index idx
42412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42421 \begin_layout Standard
42422 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42423 the highlighted document part.
42426 \begin_layout Subsection
42432 \begin_inset Index idx
42435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42436 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42445 \begin_layout Standard
42446 Generates with the help of the program
42448 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42451 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42452 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42453 This feature is not available on Windows.
42456 \begin_layout Subsection
42462 \begin_inset Index idx
42465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42475 \begin_layout Standard
42476 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42486 to see the full filename paths.
42489 \begin_layout Subsection
42491 \begin_inset Index idx
42494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 \begin_layout Standard
42504 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42505 files as described in section
42506 \begin_inset space ~
42510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42512 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42519 \begin_layout Subsection
42521 \begin_inset Index idx
42524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 \begin_inset Index idx
42558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42559 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42568 \begin_layout Standard
42569 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42570 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42571 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42572 -packages and programs it needs; see
42574 \begin_inset space ~
42578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42580 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42587 \begin_layout Subsection
42591 \begin_layout Standard
42596 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42597 \begin_inset space ~
42601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42603 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42610 \begin_layout Section
42612 \begin_inset Index idx
42615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42624 \begin_layout Standard
42625 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42626 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42628 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42632 \begin_layout Standard
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42641 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42642 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42643 packages and classes found
42644 by \SpecialChar LyX
42646 \begin_inset space ~
42650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42652 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42659 \begin_layout Standard
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42668 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42673 \begin_layout Section
42675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42677 name "sec:Toolbars"
42684 \begin_layout Standard
42685 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42686 \begin_inset space ~
42690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42692 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42699 \begin_layout Standard
42700 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42701 This is described in the
42703 Additional Features
42708 \begin_layout Subsection
42710 \begin_inset Index idx
42713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42722 \begin_layout Standard
42723 \begin_inset Graphics
42724 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42739 \begin_layout Standard
42740 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42757 \begin_inset Note Note
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42761 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42766 manual for more information.
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42775 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42781 \begin_layout Standard
42782 \begin_inset Tabular
42783 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42784 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42785 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42786 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42792 \begin_inset Graphics
42793 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42807 pull-down box for the environments
42820 \begin_layout Standard
42821 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42827 \begin_layout Standard
42829 \begin_inset Tabular
42830 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42831 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42832 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42833 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42857 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42887 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42917 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42933 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42947 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42963 arg "spelling-continuously"
42971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42975 Spellcheck continuously
42981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43004 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43034 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43094 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43124 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43126 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43131 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43149 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43163 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43189 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43203 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43231 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43245 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43246 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43274 Emphasize text, function of the
43275 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43278 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43280 \begin_inset space ~
43283 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43291 arg "dialog-show character"
43302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43323 Set text to noun style, function of the
43324 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43332 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43340 arg "dialog-show character"
43351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43357 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43360 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43373 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43376 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43389 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43394 arg "textstyle-apply"
43404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43409 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43410 Format text using the current settings in the
43412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43414 \begin_inset space ~
43417 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43452 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43472 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43500 arg "tabular-insert"
43508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43527 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43530 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43543 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43562 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43574 Toggle outline window on/off,
43576 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43604 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43619 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43631 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43644 \begin_layout Subsection
43646 \begin_inset Index idx
43649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43658 \begin_layout Standard
43659 \begin_inset Graphics
43660 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43668 \begin_layout Standard
43669 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43675 \begin_layout Standard
43676 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43680 \begin_layout Standard
43681 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43687 \begin_layout Standard
43688 \begin_inset Tabular
43689 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43690 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43691 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43692 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43729 arg "layout Enumerate"
43737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43756 arg "layout Itemize"
43764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43810 arg "layout Description"
43818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43837 arg "depth-increment"
43845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43851 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43853 \begin_inset space ~
43857 \begin_inset space ~
43866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43875 arg "depth-decrement"
43883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43889 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43895 \begin_inset space ~
43904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43913 arg "float-insert figure"
43921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43928 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43944 arg "float-insert table"
43952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43959 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44005 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44035 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44049 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44099 arg "nomencl-insert"
44107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44115 \begin_inset space ~
44124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44133 arg "footnote-insert"
44141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44163 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44212 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44214 \begin_inset space ~
44223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44232 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44341 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44357 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44372 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44374 \begin_inset space ~
44383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44392 arg "dialog-show character"
44400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44406 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44411 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44424 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44429 arg "textstyle-apply"
44437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44442 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44443 Format text using the recent settings in the
44446 arg "dialog-show character"
44455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44464 arg "layout-paragraph"
44472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44480 \begin_inset space ~
44489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44498 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44512 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44526 \begin_layout Subsection
44527 View/Update Toolbar
44528 \begin_inset Index idx
44531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 Toolbar ! View / Update
44540 \begin_layout Standard
44541 \begin_inset Graphics
44542 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44549 \begin_layout Standard
44550 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44556 \begin_layout Standard
44557 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44561 \begin_layout Standard
44562 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44568 \begin_layout Standard
44569 \begin_inset Tabular
44570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44571 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44573 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 arg "buffer-update"
44621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44643 arg "master-buffer-view"
44651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44659 \begin_inset space ~
44668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44677 arg "master-buffer-update"
44685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44715 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44731 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44732 Synchronize with Output
44738 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44749 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44766 View (Other Formats)
44772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44779 arg "update-others"
44783 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44798 Update (Other Formats)
44811 \begin_layout Standard
44813 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44814 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44820 \begin_layout Subsection
44824 \begin_layout Standard
44825 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44832 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44836 , the table toolbar
44837 \begin_inset Index idx
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44849 \begin_inset space ~
44854 manual and the math macro toolbar
44855 \begin_inset Index idx
44858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44871 \begin_layout Chapter
44872 The Document Settings
44873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44875 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44880 \begin_inset Index idx
44883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44884 Document ! Settings
44892 \begin_layout Standard
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44901 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44902 is called with the menu
44904 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44908 You can save your document settings as default with the
44910 Save as Document Defaults
44912 button in any dialog.
44913 This will create a template named
44917 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44918 when you create a new document without
44922 \begin_layout Standard
44927 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44928 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44931 \begin_layout Standard
44932 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44933 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44934 to find the one you are looking for.
44935 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44936 the submenus of the dialog.
44938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44942 \begin_inset space \space{}
44946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44953 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44954 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44955 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44958 \begin_layout Section
44962 \begin_layout Standard
44963 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44965 Document classes are described in section
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44972 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44980 \begin_layout Standard
44984 \begin_inset space ~
44989 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44994 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44995 as a layout for a document class.
44996 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44998 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45007 \begin_layout Standard
45008 Some classes use special class options by default.
45009 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45013 and you can decide to use them or not.
45014 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45015 recommended you leave them untouched.
45020 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45021 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45026 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45028 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45034 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45035 \begin_inset Newline newline
45040 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45043 \begin_inset Newline newline
45046 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45047 distribution, see section
45052 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45054 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45067 \begin_layout Standard
45072 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45073 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45074 in the background if the child document
45075 is opened without its master.
45076 This way child documents are always compilable.
45077 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45084 \begin_inset space ~
45092 \begin_layout Standard
45093 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45104 \begin_inset Index idx
45107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45109 packages ! prettyref
45115 \begin_inset Index idx
45118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45120 packages ! refstyle
45125 for cross-references, see section
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45132 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45139 \begin_layout Section
45143 \begin_layout Standard
45144 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45145 Please refer to the section
45148 \begin_inset space ~
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45161 manual for details.
45164 \begin_layout Section
45168 \begin_layout Standard
45169 Modules are explained in section
45170 \begin_inset space ~
45174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45176 reference "subsec:Modules"
45183 \begin_layout Section
45187 \begin_layout Standard
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45195 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45202 \begin_layout Section
45206 \begin_layout Standard
45207 The document font settings are described in section
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45214 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45221 \begin_layout Section
45225 \begin_layout Standard
45226 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45238 \begin_inset space ~
45243 and whether it should be a
45246 \begin_inset space ~
45251 can also be specified here.
45254 \begin_layout Standard
45255 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45256 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45257 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45259 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45262 \begin_layout Standard
45265 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45268 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45269 justifies the text on screen.
45270 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45272 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45276 \begin_layout Standard
45278 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45287 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45292 \begin_layout Section
45296 \begin_layout Standard
45297 This dialog is described in sections
45298 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45304 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45311 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45318 \begin_layout Section
45322 \begin_layout Standard
45323 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45330 reference "subsec:Margins"
45337 \begin_layout Section
45339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45341 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45346 \begin_inset Index idx
45349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45350 Language ! Encoding
45358 \begin_layout Standard
45359 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45360 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45361 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45363 is always encoded in utf8).
45364 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45365 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45366 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45367 -command is not known for
45368 a particular character).
45369 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45373 \begin_layout Standard
45375 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45376 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45377 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45378 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45379 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45380 's default encoding).
45381 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45382 's Unicode support covers the
45383 characters of most scripts.
45384 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45385 using one of the traditional, or
45386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45393 , encodings is necessary.
45396 \begin_layout Standard
45398 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45400 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45403 Traditional (auto-selected)
45409 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45410 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45411 the given language(s).
45413 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45417 \begin_layout Standard
45419 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45420 If you use the option
45425 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45428 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45429 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45432 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45435 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45436 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45437 exactly one encoding.
45438 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45443 \begin_layout Standard
45445 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45446 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45452 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45453 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45457 \begin_layout Standard
45459 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45460 Finally, you can also select
45464 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45465 Note that this encoding is then used for
45470 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45471 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45475 \begin_layout Standard
45477 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45480 Do not load inputenc
45482 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45483 from automatically loading the
45490 \begin_inset Index idx
45493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45495 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45497 packages ! inputenc
45503 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45504 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45505 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45506 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45507 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45509 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45515 Traditional (auto-selected)
45522 \begin_layout Standard
45524 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45526 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45527 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45528 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45529 installation supports Unicode), choose
45530 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45531 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45532 is quite incomplete, so
45533 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45538 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45539 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45540 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45541 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45542 -commands is not used, because all
45543 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45544 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45545 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45546 , two new alternative engines
45547 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45549 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45551 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45562 \begin_inset space ~
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45576 \begin_inset space ~
45580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45582 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45587 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45591 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45596 \begin_layout Standard
45600 \begin_inset space ~
45605 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45606 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45616 The possible settings are:
45619 \begin_layout Description
45620 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45622 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45623 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45627 \begin_inset space ~
45631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45633 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45640 \begin_layout Description
45641 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45642 format you will use.
45643 In many cases this will be
45648 \begin_inset Index idx
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45659 If the newer package
45664 \begin_inset Index idx
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45669 packages ! polyglossia
45674 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45675 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45676 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45678 this package will be used instead of
45685 \begin_layout Description
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45698 would be more appropriate.
45701 \begin_layout Description
45702 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45703 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45707 (for German texts), type in
45710 \begin_inset Newline newline
45715 usepackage{ngerman}
45718 \begin_layout Description
45719 None will not use a language package.
45720 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45723 \begin_layout Standard
45724 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45727 \begin_layout Description
45729 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45731 \begin_inset space ~
45735 \begin_inset space ~
45739 \begin_inset space ~
45746 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45752 \begin_inset Index idx
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45757 packages ! inputenc
45763 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45764 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45765 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45771 \begin_layout Description
45772 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45774 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45775 commands, which may result in a big
45776 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45777 -commands are needed.
45779 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45780 This is the same as the
45793 \begin_layout Description
45795 \begin_inset space ~
45799 \begin_inset space ~
45802 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45805 \begin_layout Description
45807 \begin_inset space ~
45811 \begin_inset space ~
45814 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45817 \begin_layout Description
45819 \begin_inset space ~
45822 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45825 \begin_layout Description
45827 \begin_inset space ~
45831 \begin_inset space ~
45834 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45835 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45838 \begin_layout Description
45840 \begin_inset space ~
45844 \begin_inset space ~
45847 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45851 \begin_layout Description
45853 \begin_inset space ~
45857 \begin_inset space ~
45860 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45861 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45864 \begin_layout Description
45866 \begin_inset space ~
45870 \begin_inset space ~
45874 \begin_inset space ~
45877 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45884 \begin_layout Description
45886 \begin_inset space ~
45890 \begin_inset space ~
45894 \begin_inset space ~
45897 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45898 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45901 \begin_layout Description
45903 \begin_inset space ~
45907 \begin_inset space ~
45910 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45911 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45912 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45913 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45914 \begin_inset space ~
45918 \begin_inset space ~
45924 \begin_layout Description
45926 \begin_inset space ~
45930 \begin_inset space ~
45933 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45934 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45935 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45937 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45938 \begin_inset space ~
45942 \begin_inset space ~
45948 \begin_layout Description
45950 \begin_inset space ~
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45957 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45960 \begin_layout Description
45962 \begin_inset space ~
45966 \begin_inset space ~
45969 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45972 \begin_layout Description
45974 \begin_inset space ~
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45981 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45984 \begin_layout Description
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45989 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45992 \begin_layout Description
45994 \begin_inset space ~
45997 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46000 \begin_layout Description
46002 \begin_inset space ~
46006 \begin_inset space ~
46009 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46012 \begin_layout Description
46014 \begin_inset space ~
46018 \begin_inset space ~
46024 \begin_layout Description
46026 \begin_inset space ~
46030 \begin_inset space ~
46033 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46036 \begin_layout Description
46038 \begin_inset space ~
46042 \begin_inset space ~
46048 \begin_layout Description
46050 \begin_inset space ~
46054 \begin_inset space ~
46057 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46063 \begin_inset Index idx
46066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46073 , when using this, set the document language to
46078 \begin_layout Description
46080 \begin_inset space ~
46084 \begin_inset space ~
46087 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46092 , when using this, set the document language to
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46101 \begin_layout Description
46103 \begin_inset space ~
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46110 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46116 \begin_inset Index idx
46119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46121 packages ! japanese
46126 , when using this, set the document language to
46131 \begin_layout Description
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46140 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46145 , when using this, set the document language to
46150 \begin_layout Description
46152 \begin_inset space ~
46156 \begin_inset space ~
46159 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46164 , when using this, set the document language to
46169 \begin_layout Description
46171 \begin_inset space ~
46174 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46177 \begin_layout Description
46179 \begin_inset space ~
46183 \begin_inset space ~
46187 \begin_inset space ~
46190 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46193 \begin_layout Description
46195 \begin_inset space ~
46199 \begin_inset space ~
46203 \begin_inset space ~
46206 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46207 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46208 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46211 \begin_layout Description
46213 \begin_inset space ~
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46223 \begin_layout Description
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46229 \begin_inset space ~
46232 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46233 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46236 \begin_layout Description
46238 \begin_inset space ~
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46245 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46251 \begin_inset Index idx
46254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46262 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46264 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46265 with the default encoding (
46267 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46273 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46274 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46279 \begin_layout Description
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46289 \begin_inset space ~
46292 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46299 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46302 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46309 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46310 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46312 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46315 \begin_layout Description
46317 \begin_inset space ~
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46324 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46330 \begin_inset Index idx
46333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46341 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46344 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46346 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46347 This used to be more comprehensive than
46350 \begin_inset space ~
46355 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46360 \begin_layout Description
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46365 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46371 \begin_inset Index idx
46374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 packages ! inputenc
46383 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46384 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46386 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46387 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46388 with the default encoding (
46390 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46396 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46397 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46402 \begin_layout Description
46404 \begin_inset space ~
46408 \begin_inset space ~
46412 \begin_inset space ~
46415 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46416 \begin_inset space ~
46422 \begin_layout Description
46424 \begin_inset space ~
46428 \begin_inset space ~
46432 \begin_inset space ~
46435 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46436 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46437 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46441 \begin_layout Description
46443 \begin_inset space ~
46447 \begin_inset space ~
46451 \begin_inset space ~
46454 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46455 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46458 \begin_layout Section
46460 \begin_inset Index idx
46463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46470 \begin_inset Index idx
46473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46480 \begin_inset Index idx
46483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 Color ! Shaded boxes
46490 \begin_inset Index idx
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46494 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46502 \begin_layout Standard
46503 Here you can alter the font color for the
46507 (default: black), for
46510 \begin_inset space ~
46515 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46519 (default: white) and for
46522 \begin_inset space ~
46532 sets the color back to the default.
46535 \begin_layout Standard
46536 Clicking any button showing
46544 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46545 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46546 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46547 later more quickly.
46550 \begin_layout Standard
46551 Note, if you change the
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46559 font color and use the option
46562 \begin_inset space ~
46567 in the document settings under
46570 \begin_inset space ~
46575 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46576 \begin_inset space ~
46580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46582 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46589 \begin_layout Standard
46590 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46596 \begin_layout Standard
46600 \begin_inset space ~
46609 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46612 \begin_inset space ~
46615 Code after a forced page break:
46618 \begin_layout Itemize
46619 For the page color:
46620 \begin_inset Newline newline
46627 pagecolor{color name}
46630 \begin_layout Itemize
46631 For the text color:
46632 \begin_inset Newline newline
46642 \begin_layout Standard
46643 You are restricted to one of
46679 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46686 \begin_inset space ~
46692 \begin_inset Newline newline
46695 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46696 names to refer to them:
46699 \begin_layout Itemize
46705 \begin_inset Newline newline
46710 page_backgroundcolor
46713 \begin_layout Itemize
46717 \begin_inset space ~
46723 \begin_inset Newline newline
46731 \begin_layout Itemize
46735 \begin_inset space ~
46741 \begin_inset Newline newline
46749 \begin_layout Itemize
46753 \begin_inset space ~
46759 \begin_inset Newline newline
46767 \begin_layout Standard
46768 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46779 \begin_inset space ~
46787 \begin_layout Section
46791 \begin_layout Standard
46792 Here you can adjust the
46796 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46800 as described in section
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46807 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46812 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46816 \begin_layout Standard
46818 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46819 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46821 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46822 of this package can be used as well.
46823 The most common one are:
46826 \begin_layout Description
46828 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46829 right Line numbers to the right margin
46832 \begin_layout Description
46834 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46835 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46839 \begin_layout Description
46841 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46842 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46845 \begin_layout Description
46847 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46848 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46851 \begin_layout Description
46853 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46855 \begin_inset space ~
46858 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46863 \begin_layout Section
46867 \begin_layout Standard
46868 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46874 \begin_inset Index idx
46877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46879 packages ! biblatex
46889 \begin_inset Index idx
46892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46904 \begin_inset Index idx
46907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46915 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46918 Sectioned bibliography
46920 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46926 \begin_inset Index idx
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 packages ! bibtopic
46941 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46942 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46946 for the generation of the bibliography.
46947 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46948 \begin_inset space ~
46952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46954 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46961 \begin_layout Section
46965 \begin_layout Standard
46966 Here you can define the
46970 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46972 \begin_inset space ~
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46978 reference "sec:Index"
46985 \begin_layout Section
46989 \begin_layout Standard
46990 The PDF properties are explained in section
46991 \begin_inset space ~
46995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46997 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47004 \begin_layout Section
47008 \begin_layout Standard
47009 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47010 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47016 \begin_inset Index idx
47019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47031 \begin_inset Index idx
47034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47046 \begin_inset Index idx
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47061 \begin_inset Index idx
47064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47076 \begin_inset Index idx
47079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47081 packages ! mathdots
47091 \begin_inset Index idx
47094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47096 packages ! mathtools
47106 \begin_inset Index idx
47109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 \begin_inset Index idx
47124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47126 packages ! stackrel
47136 \begin_inset Index idx
47139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47141 packages ! stmaryrd
47151 \begin_inset Index idx
47154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47156 packages ! undertilde
47161 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47164 \begin_layout Description
47165 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47166 -errors in formulas,
47167 ensure that you have this enabled.
47170 \begin_layout Description
47171 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47172 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47173 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47177 \begin_layout Description
47178 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47193 \begin_layout Description
47194 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47197 \begin_inset space ~
47209 \begin_layout Description
47210 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47221 \begin_layout Description
47222 mathtools is used for the math commands
47258 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47265 \begin_layout Description
47266 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47268 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47277 \begin_layout Description
47278 stackrel is used for the math command
47295 \begin_layout Description
47296 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47299 \begin_layout Description
47300 undertilde is used for the math command
47308 Accents for one Character
47317 \begin_layout Section
47319 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47321 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47327 \begin_layout Standard
47329 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47330 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47333 \begin_layout Standard
47335 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47336 The float placement options
47337 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47340 are described in the section
47343 \begin_inset space ~
47347 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47349 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47357 \begin_inset space ~
47365 \begin_layout Section
47369 \begin_layout Standard
47370 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47372 Program Code Listings
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47385 \begin_layout Section
47389 \begin_layout Standard
47390 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47398 set to be used and set the
47403 The itemize environment is described in section
47404 \begin_inset space ~
47408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47410 reference "sec:Itemize"
47417 \begin_layout Standard
47418 You can furthermore specify a
47421 \begin_inset space ~
47426 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47427 command of the desired character.
47428 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47435 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47441 \begin_inset space \space{}
47445 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47455 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47456 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47459 \begin_layout Standard
47460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47468 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47469 -packages in the preamble (menu
47472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47473 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47482 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47486 usepackage{textcomp}
47489 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47493 usepackage{amssymb}
47503 \begin_layout Section
47507 \begin_layout Standard
47508 Branches are described in section
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47515 reference "sec:Branches"
47522 \begin_layout Section
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47526 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47533 \begin_layout Standard
47534 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47537 \begin_layout Description
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47543 \begin_inset space ~
47546 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47566 View Master Document
47567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47574 Update Master Document
47575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47582 menu or the toolbar.
47583 The default is set in
47585 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47586 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47588 \begin_inset space ~
47591 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47601 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47608 \begin_layout Description
47610 \begin_inset space ~
47614 \begin_inset space ~
47617 Output settings for the menu
47619 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47621 \begin_inset space ~
47627 For a detailed description see section
47629 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47634 \begin_inset space ~
47642 \begin_layout Description
47644 \begin_inset space ~
47648 \begin_inset space ~
47651 Options offers settings for the export format
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47664 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47668 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47672 \begin_inset space ~
47677 settings are described in detail in section
47679 Math Output in XHTML
47684 \begin_inset space ~
47693 \begin_inset space ~
47697 \begin_inset space ~
47702 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47705 \begin_layout Description
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47712 Save transient properties
47714 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47715 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47716 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47720 \begin_layout Itemize
47721 the activation of change tracking
47724 \begin_layout Itemize
47725 the output of tracked changes
47728 \begin_layout Itemize
47729 the recording of the document directory path.
47732 \begin_layout Standard
47733 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47734 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47738 \begin_layout Section
47746 \begin_layout Standard
47747 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47749 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47751 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47753 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47757 \begin_layout Standard
47758 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47759 -syntax is given in section
47760 \begin_inset space ~
47764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47766 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47773 \begin_layout Chapter
47779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47781 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47786 \begin_inset Index idx
47789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47798 \begin_layout Standard
47799 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47801 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47805 It has the following submenus.
47808 \begin_layout Section
47812 \begin_layout Subsection
47816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47817 User Interface File
47818 \begin_inset Index idx
47821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47822 Customization ! of toolbars
47828 \begin_inset Index idx
47831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47832 Customization ! of menus
47840 \begin_layout Standard
47841 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47842 interface (ui) file.
47843 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47851 \begin_layout Description
47856 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47859 \begin_layout Description
47866 the menu entries in popup context menus
47869 \begin_layout Description
47874 specifies the toolbar buttons
47877 \begin_layout Standard
47878 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47879 and edit the entries.
47882 \begin_layout Standard
47883 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47895 entries must be finished with an explicit
47920 and in the case of the
47921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47933 The syntax for the entries is:
47936 \begin_layout Standard
47937 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47966 \begin_layout Standard
47968 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47971 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47972 -functions are listed in the menu
47974 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47976 \begin_inset space ~
47984 \begin_layout Standard
47985 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47991 \begin_layout Standard
47992 For example, assuming you use the menu
47994 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47997 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48001 \begin_layout Standard
48002 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48026 \begin_layout Standard
48028 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48043 to have the sixth bookmark.
48046 \begin_layout Standard
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48055 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48056 's toolbar buttons.
48057 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48061 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48073 \begin_layout Standard
48076 Enable tool tips in main work area
48078 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48082 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48086 \begin_layout Standard
48091 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48092 should display in the menu
48094 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48096 \begin_inset space ~
48104 \begin_layout Subsection
48108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48112 \begin_layout Standard
48115 Restore window layouts and geometries
48118 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48119 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48123 \begin_layout Standard
48126 Restore cursor positions
48128 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48132 \begin_layout Standard
48135 Load opened files from last session
48137 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48141 \begin_layout Standard
48144 Clear all session information
48146 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48147 sessions (cursor positions, names
48148 of last opened documents, etc.).
48151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48155 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48160 \begin_inset Index idx
48163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48172 \begin_layout Standard
48175 Backup original documents when saving
48177 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48178 it was saved the last time.
48179 It is stored in the
48182 \begin_inset space ~
48188 \begin_inset space ~
48192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48194 reference "sec:Paths"
48198 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48201 \begin_inset space ~
48207 The backup file has the file extension
48208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48222 \begin_layout Standard
48225 Backup documents, every
48227 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48230 \begin_layout Standard
48233 Save documents compressed by default
48235 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48236 \begin_inset space ~
48240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48242 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48247 This applies to newly created documents only.
48248 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48252 Windows & work area
48255 \begin_layout Standard
48258 Open documents in tabs
48260 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48264 \begin_layout Standard
48269 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48276 \begin_inset space ~
48280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48282 reference "sec:Paths"
48286 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48293 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48294 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48295 of \SpecialChar LyX
48297 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48298 instance is created for each file.
48301 \begin_layout Standard
48304 Single close-tab button
48306 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48316 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48317 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48318 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48322 \begin_layout Standard
48323 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48331 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48332 before the change takes effect.
48340 \begin_layout Standard
48345 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48347 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48349 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48353 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48354 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48355 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48358 \begin_layout Subsection
48360 \begin_inset Index idx
48363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48372 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48379 \begin_layout Standard
48380 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48384 \begin_layout Standard
48385 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48393 This section only deals with the fonts
48397 the \SpecialChar LyX
48399 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48403 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48414 \begin_layout Standard
48415 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48432 (depends on the system) as its
48435 \begin_inset space ~
48451 \begin_layout Standard
48452 You can change the font size with the
48459 \begin_layout Standard
48464 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48469 points have the size of 1
48470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48474 \begin_inset space ~
48478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48480 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48485 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48490 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48491 \begin_inset space ~
48495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48497 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48504 \begin_layout Subsection
48506 \begin_inset Index idx
48509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48510 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48517 \begin_inset Index idx
48520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48529 \begin_layout Standard
48530 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48531 by choosing an item in the
48532 list and selecting the
48539 \begin_layout Standard
48540 By checking the option
48544 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48547 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48548 \begin_inset space ~
48552 \begin_inset space ~
48557 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48560 \begin_layout Subsection
48562 \begin_inset Index idx
48565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48574 \begin_layout Standard
48575 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48579 \begin_layout Standard
48584 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48585 This feature is described in section
48586 \begin_inset space ~
48590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48592 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48599 \begin_layout Standard
48600 Checking the option
48603 \begin_inset space ~
48607 \begin_inset space ~
48611 \begin_inset space ~
48616 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48619 \begin_layout Section
48621 \begin_inset Index idx
48624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48633 \begin_layout Subsection
48637 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48641 \begin_layout Standard
48644 Cursor follows scrollbar
48646 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48650 \begin_layout Standard
48651 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48652 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48653 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48656 \begin_layout Standard
48659 Scroll below end of document
48661 is self-explanatory.
48664 \begin_layout Standard
48665 In \SpecialChar LyX
48666 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48673 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48675 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48676 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48679 \begin_layout Standard
48682 Sort environments alphabetically
48684 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48687 \begin_layout Standard
48690 Group environments by their category
48692 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48695 \begin_layout Standard
48700 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48711 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48715 \begin_layout Standard
48716 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48721 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48722 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48726 \begin_layout Subsection
48728 \begin_inset Index idx
48731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 \begin_inset Index idx
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48742 Settings ! Shortcuts
48750 \begin_layout Standard
48755 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48757 Several binding files are available, among them:
48760 \begin_layout Description
48761 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48764 \begin_layout Description
48765 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48777 \begin_layout Description
48778 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48789 \begin_layout Standard
48790 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48795 , and binding files for special languages.
48796 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48801 \begin_inset space \space{}
48805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48813 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48814 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48815 will try to use the appropriate binding
48819 \begin_layout Standard
48820 Some binding files, like
48824 , only have a limited scope.
48825 When looking at the end of the file
48829 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48832 \begin_layout Standard
48836 \begin_inset space ~
48840 \begin_inset space ~
48845 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48846 in the selected key binding file.
48849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48853 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48858 \begin_inset Index idx
48861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48862 Key Bindings ! Editing
48870 \begin_layout Standard
48871 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48872 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48873 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48874 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48877 Show key-bindings containing
48880 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48881 Insert there for example as keyword
48882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48889 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48890 functions that contain
48891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48899 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48900 All \SpecialChar LyX
48901 functions are also listed in the file
48906 that you will find in the
48913 \begin_layout Standard
48914 For example, to add the shortcut
48922 , select the function and press the
48927 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48928 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48931 \begin_layout Standard
48932 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48933 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48935 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48936 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48938 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48943 \begin_layout Standard
48944 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48947 \begin_layout Standard
48948 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48950 The syntax of the entries is:
48953 \begin_layout Standard
48959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48978 \begin_layout Standard
48979 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48980 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49008 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49009 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49010 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49011 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49013 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49017 , you needed to specify it as
49022 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49025 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49028 \begin_layout Subsection
49030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49032 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49037 \begin_inset Index idx
49040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49047 \begin_inset Index idx
49050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49051 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49059 \begin_layout Standard
49060 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49061 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49062 provides keyboard maps.
49063 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49064 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49067 \begin_inset space ~
49071 \begin_inset space ~
49076 and select the keyboard map file named
49083 \begin_layout Standard
49092 keyboard map and, if you use the
49096 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49099 arg "keymap-primary"
49105 arg "keymap-secondary"
49108 respectively or toggle between them with
49111 arg "keymap-toggle"
49117 \begin_layout Standard
49118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49126 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49135 \begin_layout Standard
49136 You can also specify the mouse
49138 Wheel scrolling speed
49141 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49145 Middle mouse button pasting
49147 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49148 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49151 \begin_layout Standard
49159 \begin_inset space ~
49163 \begin_inset space ~
49168 you can select a key for zooming.
49169 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49172 \begin_layout Subsection
49176 \begin_layout Standard
49177 Input completion is described in section
49178 \begin_inset space ~
49182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49184 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49191 \begin_layout Section
49193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49200 \begin_inset Index idx
49203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49210 \begin_inset Index idx
49213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49222 \begin_layout Standard
49223 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49224 are normally determined during
49226 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49229 \begin_layout Description
49231 \begin_inset space ~
49234 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49235 's working directory.
49236 It is the default when you
49247 \begin_inset space ~
49255 \begin_layout Description
49257 \begin_inset space ~
49260 templates This directory
49261 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49262 contains the templates that are shown
49263 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49264 will be opened when you use the menu
49265 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49270 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49272 \begin_inset space ~
49276 \begin_inset space ~
49284 \begin_layout Description
49286 \begin_inset space ~
49289 files This directory
49290 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49291 will be opened when you use the
49292 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49293 contains the example files that are listed in
49296 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49305 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49307 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49309 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49315 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49317 \begin_inset Newline newline
49321 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49333 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49334 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49344 \begin_layout Description
49346 \begin_inset space ~
49350 \begin_inset Index idx
49353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49359 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49360 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49361 \begin_inset space ~
49365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49367 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49375 will be used to save the backups.
49376 \begin_inset Newline newline
49379 Backup files have the ending
49380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49390 \begin_layout Description
49392 \begin_inset space ~
49395 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49396 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49398 \begin_inset Newline newline
49405 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49411 You can edit this file with the program
49420 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49421 in its preferences under
49424 \begin_inset space ~
49430 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49435 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49437 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49438 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49444 and \SpecialChar LyX
49445 need to be running the same time.
49446 \begin_inset Newline newline
49449 The pipe is also used for the
49453 feature, see section
49454 \begin_inset space ~
49458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49460 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49465 \begin_inset Newline newline
49468 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49469 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49470 \begin_inset Newline newline
49486 \begin_layout Description
49488 \begin_inset space ~
49491 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49494 \begin_layout Description
49496 \begin_inset space ~
49499 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49500 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49501 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49504 \begin_layout Description
49506 \begin_inset space ~
49509 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49515 You only need to specify it if you are using
49519 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49521 For \SpecialChar LyX
49526 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49530 \begin_layout Description
49532 \begin_inset space ~
49535 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49536 When \SpecialChar LyX
49537 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49538 to find it on the system.
49539 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49541 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49550 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49551 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49554 \begin_layout Description
49556 \begin_inset space ~
49559 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49560 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49561 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49562 code or in the document
49564 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49566 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49567 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49568 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49569 scanned for the input files.
49570 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49571 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49573 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49574 compilation may fail for some documents.
49577 \begin_layout Section
49581 \begin_layout Standard
49582 Here you can insert your
49591 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49593 \begin_inset space ~
49597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49599 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49603 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49606 \begin_layout Section
49608 \begin_inset Index idx
49611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49612 Language ! Settings
49618 \begin_inset Index idx
49621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49622 Settings ! Language
49630 \begin_layout Subsection
49632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49634 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49641 \begin_layout Description
49643 \begin_inset space ~
49647 \begin_inset space ~
49650 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49652 You can find its actual translation status here:
49653 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49655 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49663 \begin_layout Description
49665 \begin_inset space ~
49668 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49669 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49670 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49671 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49688 The most widespread language package is
49693 \begin_inset Index idx
49696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49703 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49705 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49706 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49707 come with the alternative
49713 \begin_inset Index idx
49716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49718 packages ! polyglossia
49723 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49724 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49730 The available selections are described in section
49731 \begin_inset space ~
49735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49737 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49744 \begin_layout Description
49746 \begin_inset space ~
49749 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49750 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49751 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49752 An example is the start command
49758 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49760 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49764 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49780 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49785 \begin_layout Description
49787 \begin_inset space ~
49795 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49796 command toggles the package on and off.
49799 \begin_layout Description
49801 \begin_inset space ~
49805 \begin_inset space ~
49808 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49812 \begin_layout Description
49814 \begin_inset space ~
49818 \begin_inset space ~
49821 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49825 \begin_layout Description
49827 \begin_inset space ~
49831 \begin_inset space ~
49834 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49835 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49836 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49838 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49845 \begin_layout Description
49847 \begin_inset space ~
49850 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49852 When this option is not set, the
49855 \begin_inset space ~
49860 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49862 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49865 \begin_inset space ~
49873 \begin_layout Description
49875 \begin_inset space ~
49881 \begin_inset space ~
49887 When it is not set, the
49890 \begin_inset space ~
49895 is set to the end of the document.
49898 \begin_layout Description
49900 \begin_inset space ~
49904 \begin_inset space ~
49907 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49908 language will be underlined in blue.
49911 \begin_layout Description
49913 \begin_inset space ~
49917 \begin_inset space ~
49920 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49921 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49924 \begin_layout Description
49926 \begin_inset space ~
49929 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49930 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49931 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49932 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49935 \begin_layout Subsection
49939 \begin_layout Standard
49940 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49941 \begin_inset space ~
49945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49947 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49954 \begin_layout Section
49958 \begin_layout Subsection
49960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49962 name "subsec:General-output"
49969 \begin_layout Description
49971 \begin_inset space ~
49974 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49976 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49978 \begin_inset space ~
49984 For a detailed description see section
49986 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49991 \begin_inset space ~
49999 \begin_layout Description
50001 \begin_inset space ~
50004 Options Options for the program
50008 that is used for the export format
50013 \begin_inset space ~
50017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50019 reference "subsec:Export"
50024 Possible options are listed in the
50029 \begin_inset Newline newline
50033 \begin_inset Flex URL
50036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50038 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50048 \begin_layout Description
50050 \begin_inset space ~
50054 \begin_inset space ~
50057 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50060 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50061 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50063 \begin_inset space ~
50069 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50072 \begin_layout Description
50074 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50076 \begin_inset space ~
50080 \begin_inset Index idx
50083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50090 \begin_inset Index idx
50093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50094 Settings ! Date format
50099 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50100 \begin_inset Newline newline
50104 \begin_inset Flex URL
50107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50109 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50115 \begin_inset Newline newline
50118 For example the format
50119 \begin_inset Newline newline
50123 \begin_inset Newline newline
50126 prints the date as day/month/year.
50131 \begin_layout Description
50133 \begin_inset space ~
50137 \begin_inset space ~
50140 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50141 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50144 \begin_layout Subsection
50150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50152 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50157 \begin_inset Index idx
50160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50161 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50170 \begin_layout Description
50172 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50174 \begin_inset space ~
50182 \begin_inset space ~
50186 \begin_inset space ~
50189 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50194 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50215 are used for Cyrillic.
50216 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50229 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50231 sets up in the background.
50232 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50237 \begin_layout Description
50239 \begin_inset space ~
50243 \begin_inset space ~
50247 \begin_inset space ~
50251 \begin_inset space ~
50254 options They only have an effect when the program
50258 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50261 \begin_layout Standard
50262 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50263 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50264 manuals of the applications.
50267 \begin_layout Description
50269 \begin_inset space ~
50272 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
50273 \begin_inset space ~
50277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50279 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50286 \begin_layout Description
50288 \begin_inset space ~
50291 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
50292 \begin_inset space ~
50296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50298 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50305 \begin_layout Description
50307 \begin_inset space ~
50310 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
50311 \begin_inset space ~
50315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50317 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50324 \begin_layout Description
50330 \begin_inset space ~
50333 command Command for the program
50335 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50338 that is described in the section
50340 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50345 Additional Features
50350 \begin_layout Standard
50351 There are additionally the following options:
50354 \begin_layout Description
50356 \begin_inset space ~
50360 \begin_inset space ~
50364 \begin_inset space ~
50368 \begin_inset space ~
50373 \begin_inset space ~
50376 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50394 to separate folders.
50395 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50397 \begin_inset Index idx
50400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50407 \begin_inset Index idx
50410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50419 \begin_layout Description
50421 \begin_inset space ~
50425 \begin_inset space ~
50429 \begin_inset space ~
50433 \begin_inset space ~
50437 \begin_inset space ~
50441 \begin_inset space ~
50444 changes Removes all manually set
50450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50451 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50458 dialog when changing the document class.
50461 \begin_layout Section
50463 \begin_inset space ~
50467 \begin_inset Index idx
50470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50479 \begin_layout Subsection
50481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50483 name "subsec:Converters"
50488 \begin_inset Index idx
50491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50500 \begin_layout Standard
50501 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50502 from one format to another.
50503 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50504 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50511 \begin_inset space ~
50516 field and press the
50521 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50525 \begin_inset space ~
50530 drop-down list, modify the
50534 field and press the
50541 \begin_layout Standard
50544 Converter File Cache
50550 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50552 Maximum Age (in days
50555 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50556 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50559 \begin_layout Standard
50560 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50561 definition, is described in the section
50572 \begin_layout Subsection
50574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50576 name "sec:File-Formats"
50581 \begin_inset Index idx
50584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50591 \begin_inset Index idx
50594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50603 \begin_layout Standard
50604 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50614 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50617 \begin_layout Standard
50618 You can also define the
50620 Default output format
50622 that is used when you use
50624 View, Update, View Master Document
50628 Update Master Document
50634 menu or the toolbar.
50637 \begin_layout Standard
50638 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50649 \begin_layout Standard
50650 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
50652 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
50653 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
50654 This is done by specifying a
50659 More about this is described in the section
50670 \begin_layout Chapter
50671 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50673 \begin_inset Index idx
50676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50685 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50692 \begin_layout Standard
50694 \begin_inset space ~
50698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50700 reference "tab:Units"
50704 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50705 and used in this documentation.
50708 \begin_layout Standard
50709 \begin_inset Float table
50716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50717 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50735 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50743 \begin_inset Tabular
50744 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50745 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50746 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50747 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50901 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51172 scaled point (65536
51173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51240 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51364 % of original image width
51369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51453 \begin_layout Standard
51454 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51457 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
51464 \begin_layout Bibliography
51465 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51466 LatexCommand bibitem
51473 The \SpecialChar LyX
51475 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51478 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51484 \begin_inset Newline newline
51488 \begin_inset Flex URL
51491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51493 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51501 \begin_layout Bibliography
51502 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51503 LatexCommand bibitem
51504 key "latexcompanion"
51509 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51511 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51512 Companion Second Edition.
51515 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51518 \begin_layout Bibliography
51519 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51520 LatexCommand bibitem
51526 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51529 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51533 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51536 \begin_layout Bibliography
51537 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51538 LatexCommand bibitem
51547 : A Document Preparation System.
51550 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51553 \begin_layout Bibliography
51554 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51555 LatexCommand bibitem
51565 The \SpecialChar TeX
51569 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51572 \begin_layout Bibliography
51573 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51574 LatexCommand bibitem
51580 The \SpecialChar TeX
51582 \begin_inset Newline newline
51586 \begin_inset Flex URL
51589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51591 https://ctan.org/topic
51599 \begin_layout Bibliography
51600 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51601 LatexCommand bibitem
51607 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51609 \begin_inset Newline newline
51613 \begin_inset Flex URL
51616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51618 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51626 \begin_layout Bibliography
51627 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51628 LatexCommand bibitem
51635 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51637 name "Documentation"
51638 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
51645 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51649 \begin_inset Newline newline
51653 \begin_inset Flex URL
51656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51658 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51666 \begin_layout Bibliography
51667 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51668 LatexCommand bibitem
51675 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51677 name "Documentation"
51678 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51683 how to use the program
51685 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51689 \begin_inset Newline newline
51693 \begin_inset Flex URL
51696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51698 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51706 \begin_layout Bibliography
51707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51708 LatexCommand bibitem
51715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51717 name "Documentation"
51718 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51723 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51729 \begin_inset Index idx
51732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51734 packages ! biblatex
51740 \begin_inset Newline newline
51744 \begin_inset Flex URL
51747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51749 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51757 \begin_layout Bibliography
51758 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51759 LatexCommand bibitem
51766 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51768 name "Documentation"
51769 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51774 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51780 \begin_inset Index idx
51783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51791 \begin_inset Newline newline
51795 \begin_inset Flex URL
51798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51800 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51808 \begin_layout Bibliography
51809 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51810 LatexCommand bibitem
51817 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51819 name "Documentation"
51820 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51830 \begin_inset Newline newline
51834 \begin_inset Flex URL
51837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51839 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51847 \begin_layout Bibliography
51848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51849 LatexCommand bibitem
51850 key "makeindex-man"
51856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51859 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51869 \begin_inset Newline newline
51873 \begin_inset Flex URL
51876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51878 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51886 \begin_layout Bibliography
51887 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51888 LatexCommand bibitem
51895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51897 name "Documentation"
51898 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51908 \begin_inset Newline newline
51912 \begin_inset Flex URL
51915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51917 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51925 \begin_layout Bibliography
51926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51927 LatexCommand bibitem
51934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51936 name "Documentation"
51937 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51942 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51944 \begin_inset Newline newline
51948 \begin_inset Flex URL
51951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51953 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51961 \begin_layout Bibliography
51962 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51963 LatexCommand bibitem
51970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51972 name "Documentation"
51973 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51978 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51984 \begin_inset Index idx
51987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51995 \begin_inset Newline newline
51999 \begin_inset Flex URL
52002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52004 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52012 \begin_layout Bibliography
52013 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52014 LatexCommand bibitem
52021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52023 name "Documentation"
52024 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52029 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52035 \begin_inset Index idx
52038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52040 packages ! enumitem
52046 \begin_inset Newline newline
52050 \begin_inset Flex URL
52053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52055 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52063 \begin_layout Bibliography
52064 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52065 LatexCommand bibitem
52072 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52074 name "Documentation"
52075 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52080 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52086 \begin_inset Index idx
52089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52091 packages ! fancyhdr
52097 \begin_inset Newline newline
52101 \begin_inset Flex URL
52104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52106 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52114 \begin_layout Bibliography
52115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52116 LatexCommand bibitem
52123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52125 name "Documentation"
52126 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52131 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52137 \begin_inset Index idx
52140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52142 packages ! hyperref
52148 \begin_inset Newline newline
52152 \begin_inset Flex URL
52155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52157 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52165 \begin_layout Bibliography
52166 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52167 LatexCommand bibitem
52174 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52176 name "Documentation"
52177 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52182 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52188 \begin_inset Index idx
52191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52193 packages ! microtpye
52199 \begin_inset Newline newline
52203 \begin_inset Flex URL
52206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52208 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52216 \begin_layout Bibliography
52217 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52218 LatexCommand bibitem
52225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52227 name "Documentation"
52228 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52233 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52239 \begin_inset Index idx
52242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52250 \begin_inset Newline newline
52254 \begin_inset Flex URL
52257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52259 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52267 \begin_layout Bibliography
52268 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52269 LatexCommand bibitem
52276 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52278 name "Documentation"
52279 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52284 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52290 \begin_inset Index idx
52293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52295 packages ! prettyref
52301 \begin_inset Newline newline
52305 \begin_inset Flex URL
52308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52310 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52318 \begin_layout Bibliography
52319 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52320 LatexCommand bibitem
52327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52329 name "Documentation"
52330 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52335 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52341 \begin_inset Index idx
52344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52346 packages ! refstyle
52352 \begin_inset Newline newline
52356 \begin_inset Flex URL
52359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52361 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52369 \begin_layout Bibliography
52370 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52371 LatexCommand bibitem
52378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52381 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52386 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52388 \begin_inset Newline newline
52392 \begin_inset Flex URL
52395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52397 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52405 \begin_layout Bibliography
52406 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52407 LatexCommand bibitem
52414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52417 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52422 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52424 \begin_inset Newline newline
52428 \begin_inset Flex URL
52431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52433 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52441 \begin_layout Bibliography
52442 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52443 LatexCommand bibitem
52450 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52453 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
52458 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52459 for Cyrillic languages:
52460 \begin_inset Newline newline
52464 \begin_inset Flex URL
52467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52469 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
52477 \begin_layout Bibliography
52478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52479 LatexCommand bibitem
52486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52489 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52494 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52496 \begin_inset Newline newline
52500 \begin_inset Flex URL
52503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52505 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52513 \begin_layout Bibliography
52514 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52515 LatexCommand bibitem
52522 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52525 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52530 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52532 \begin_inset Newline newline
52536 \begin_inset Flex URL
52539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52541 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52549 \begin_layout Bibliography
52550 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52551 LatexCommand bibitem
52558 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52561 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52566 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52568 \begin_inset Newline newline
52572 \begin_inset Flex URL
52575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52577 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52585 \begin_layout Standard
52586 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52620 \begin_inset Note Note
52623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52630 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52631 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52632 bibliography is the second one:
52640 \begin_layout Standard
52641 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52642 LatexCommand bibtex
52643 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
52644 options "biblio/alphadin"
52651 \begin_layout Standard
52652 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52656 \begin_layout Standard
52660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52666 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52675 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52683 \begin_inset Note Note
52686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52687 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52688 \begin_inset space ~
52692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52694 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52706 \begin_layout Standard
52707 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52708 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52714 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52715 LatexCommand printindex